Please note that Cypress is an Infineon Technologies Company.
The document following this cover page is marked as “Cypress” document as this is the
company that originally developed the product. Please note that Infineon will continue
to offer the product to new and existing customers as part of the Infineon product
portfolio.
Continuity of document content
The fact that Infineon offers the following product as part of the Infineon product
portfolio does not lead to any changes to this document. Future revisions will occur
when appropriate, and any changes will be set out on the document history page.
Continuity of ordering part numbers
Infineon continues to support existing part numbers. Please continue to use the
ordering part numbers listed in the datasheet for ordering.
www.infineon.com
S25FL512S
512 Mb (64 MB), 3.0 V SPI Flash Memory
S25FL512S, 512 Mb (64 MB), 3.0 V SPI Flash Memory
Features
CMOS 3.0 V Core with versatile I/O
SPI with Multi-I/O
Density
❐ 512 Mb (64 MB)
SPI
❐ SPI Clock polarity and phase modes 0 and 3
❐ DDR option
❐ Extended Addressing: 32-bit address
❐ Serial Command set and footprint compatible with
S25FL-A, S25FL-K, and S25FL-P SPI families
❐ Multi I/O Command set and footprint compatible with the
S25FL-P SPI family
READ Commands
❐ Normal, Fast, Dual, Quad, Fast DDR, Dual DDR, Quad DDR
❐ AutoBoot - power up or reset and execute a Normal or Quad
read command automatically at a preselected address
❐ Common Flash Interface (CFI) data for configuration information.
Programming (1.5 MBps)
❐ 512-byte Page Programming buffer
❐ Quad-Input Page Programming (QPP) for slow clock systems
❐ Automatic ECC -internal hardware Error Correction Code
generation with single bit error correction
Erase (0.5 to 0.65 MBps)
❐ Uniform 256-KB sectors
Cycling Endurance
❐ 100,000 Program-Erase Cycles, minimum
Data Retention
❐ 20-Year Data Retention, minimum
Security Features
❐ OTP array of 1024 bytes
❐ Block Protection:
• Status Register bits to control protection against program
or erase of a contiguous range of sectors.
• Hardware and software control options
❐ Advanced Sector Protection (ASP)
• Individual sector protection controlled by boot code or
password
Cypress 65 nm MirrorBit® Technology with Eclipse™
Architecture
Core supply voltage: 2.7 V to 3.6 V
I/O supply voltage: 1.65 V to 3.6 V
❐ SO16 and FBGA packages
Temperature range:
❐ Industrial (–40 °C to +85 °C)
❐ Industrial Plus (–40 °C to +105 °C)
❐ Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade 3 (–40 °C to +85 °C)
❐ Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade 2 (–40 °C to +105 °C)
❐ Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade 1 (–40 °C to +125 °C)
Packages (all Pb-free)
❐ 16-pin SOIC (300 mil)
❐ 24-BGA (6 × 8 mm)
• 5 × 5 ball (FAB024) and 4 × 6 ball (FAC024) footprint
options
❐ Known Good Die and Known Tested Die
Logic Block Diagram
CS#
X Decoders
SRAM
SCK
SI/IO0
SO/IO1
Y Decoders
I/O
WP#/IO2
MirrorBit Array
Data Latch
Control
Logic
HOLD#/IO3
Data Path
RESET#
Cypress Semiconductor Corporation
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
•
198 Champion Court
•
San Jose, CA 95134-1709
•
408-943-2600
Revised April 30, 2019
S25FL512S
Performance Summary
Maximum Read Rates with the Same Core and I/O Voltage (VIO = VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V)
Command
Clock Rate (MHz)
MBps
Read
50
6.25
Fast Read
133
16.6
Dual Read
104
26
Quad Read
104
52
Maximum Read Rates with Lower I/O Voltage (VIO = 1.65 V to 2.7 V, VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V)
Clock Rate (MHz)
MBps
Read
Command
50
6.25
Fast Read
66
8.25
Dual Read
66
16.5
Quad Read
66
33
Maximum Read Rates DDR (VIO = VCC = 3 V to 3.6 V)
Clock Rate (MHz)
MBps
Fast Read DDR
Command
80
20
Dual Read DDR
80
40
Quad Read DDR
80
80
Typical Program and Erase Rates
Operation
KBps
Page Programming (512-byte page buffer - Uniform Sector Option)
1500
256-KB Logical Sector Erase (Uniform Sector Option)
500
Current Consumption
Operation
Clock Rate (MHz)
Serial Read 50 MHz
16 (max)
Serial Read 133 MHz
33 (max)
Quad Read 104 MHz
61 (max)
Program
100 (max)
Erase
100 (max)
Standby
0.07 (typ)
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 2 of 136
S25FL512S
Contents
1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Overview .......................................................................
General Description .......................................................
Migration Notes..............................................................
Glossary.........................................................................
Other Resources............................................................
4
4
4
6
7
Hardware Interface
2.
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
Signal Descriptions ..................................................... 8
Input/Output Summary................................................... 8
Address and Data Configuration.................................... 9
RESET# ......................................................................... 9
Serial Clock (SCK) ......................................................... 9
Chip Select (CS#) .......................................................... 9
Serial Input (SI) / I/O0 .................................................... 9
Serial Output (SO) / I/O1.............................................. 10
Write Protect (WP#) / I/O2 ........................................... 10
Hold (HOLD#) / I/O3 .................................................... 10
Core Voltage Supply (VCC) .......................................... 11
Versatile I/O Power Supply (VIO) ................................. 11
Supply and Signal Ground (VSS) ................................. 11
Not Connected (NC) .................................................... 11
Reserved for Future Use (RFU)................................... 11
Do Not Use (DNU) ....................................................... 11
Block Diagrams............................................................ 12
3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Signal Protocols.........................................................
SPI Clock Modes .........................................................
Command Protocol ......................................................
Interface States............................................................
Configuration Register Effects on the Interface ...........
Data Protection ............................................................
13
13
14
18
23
23
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
Electrical Specifications............................................
Absolute Maximum Ratings .........................................
Thermal Resistance .....................................................
Operating Ranges........................................................
Power-Up and Power-Down ........................................
DC Characteristics .......................................................
24
24
24
24
25
27
5.
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
Timing Specifications................................................
Key to Switching Waveforms .......................................
AC Test Conditions ......................................................
Reset............................................................................
SDR AC Characteristics...............................................
DDR AC Characteristics ..............................................
28
28
29
30
32
36
6.
6.1
6.2
6.3
Physical Interface ......................................................
SOIC 16-Lead Package ...............................................
FAB024 24-Ball BGA Package ....................................
FAC024 24-Ball BGA Package ....................................
38
38
40
42
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Software Interface
7.
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
Address Space Maps.................................................. 44
Overview....................................................................... 44
Flash Memory Array...................................................... 44
ID-CFI Address Space .................................................. 44
JEDEC JESD216 Serial Flash Discoverable
Parameters (SFDP) Space. .......................................... 45
OTP Address Space ..................................................... 45
Registers....................................................................... 47
8.
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
Data Protection ........................................................... 56
Secure Silicon Region (OTP)........................................ 56
Write Enable Command................................................ 56
Block Protection ............................................................ 57
Advanced Sector Protection ......................................... 58
9.
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
9.10
Commands .................................................................. 62
Command Set Summary............................................... 63
Identification Commands .............................................. 68
Register Access Commands......................................... 70
Read Memory Array Commands .................................. 78
Program Flash Array Commands ................................. 92
Erase Flash Array Commands...................................... 95
One Time Program Array Commands .......................... 98
Advanced Sector Protection Commands ...................... 99
Reset Commands ....................................................... 103
Embedded Algorithm Performance Tables ................. 104
10. Data Integrity ............................................................. 105
10.1 Erase Endurance ........................................................ 105
10.2 Data Retention ............................................................ 105
11. Software Interface Reference .................................. 106
11.1 Command Summary ................................................... 106
11.2 Serial Flash Discoverable Parameters
(SFDP) Address Map.................................................. 108
11.3 Device ID and Common Flash Interface
(ID-CFI) Address Map................................................. 111
11.4 Device ID and Common Flash Interface
(ID-CFI) ASO Map — Automotive Only ...................... 127
11.5 Registers..................................................................... 127
11.6 Initial Delivery State .................................................... 130
12 Ordering Information ................................................ 131
12.1 Valid Combinations — Standard................................. 132
12.2 Valid Combinations — Automotive Grade /
AEC-Q100 .................................................................. 132
13. Revision History........................................................ 133
Document History Page ....................................................133
Sales, Solutions, and Legal Information .........................136
Worldwide Sales and Design Support ..........................136
Products .......................................................................136
PSoC® Solutions .........................................................136
Cypress Developer Community ....................................136
Technical Support ........................................................136
Page 3 of 136
S25FL512S
1. Overview
1.1 General Description
The Cypress S25FL512S device is a flash nonvolatile memory product using:
■
MirrorBit technology - that stores two data bits in each memory array transistor
■
Eclipse architecture - that dramatically improves program and erase performance
■
65 nm process lithography
This device connects to a host system via an SPI. Traditional SPI single bit serial input and output (Single I/O or SIO) is supported as
well as optional two bit (Dual I/O or DIO) and four bit (Quad I/O or QIO) serial commands. This multiple width interface is called SPI
Multi-I/O or MIO. In addition, the FL-S family adds support for Double Data Rate (DDR) read commands for SIO, DIO, and QIO that
transfer address and read data on both edges of the clock.
The Eclipse architecture features a Page Programming Buffer that allows up to 256 words (512 bytes) to be programmed in one
operation, resulting in faster effective programming and erase than prior generation SPI program or erase algorithms.
Executing code directly from flash memory is often called Execute-In-Place or XIP. By using FL-S devices at the higher clock rates
supported, with QIO or DDR-QIO commands, the instruction read transfer rate can match or exceed traditional parallel interface,
asynchronous, NOR flash memories while reducing signal count dramatically.
The S25FL512S product offers high densities coupled with the flexibility and fast performance required by a variety of embedded
applications. It is ideal for code shadowing, XIP, and data storage.
1.2 Migration Notes
1.2.1
Features Comparison
The S25FL512S device is command set and footprint compatible with prior generation FL-K and FL-P families.
Table 1. FL Generations Comparison
Parameter
FL-K
FL-P
FL-S
90 nm
90 nm
65 nm
Architecture
Floating Gate
MirrorBit
MirrorBit Eclipse
Release Date
In Production
In Production
In Production
Density
4 Mb–128 Mb
32 Mb–256 Mb
512 Mb
x1, x2, x4
x1, x2, x4
x1, x2, x4
2.7 V–3.6 V
2.7 V–3.6 V
2.7 V–3.6 V / 1.65 V–3.6 V VIO
6 MBps (50 MHz)
5 MBps (40 MHz)
6 MBps (50 MHz)
Technology Node
Bus Width
Supply Voltage
Normal Read Speed (SDR)
Fast Read Speed (SDR)
13 MBps (104 MHz)
13 MBps (104 MHz)
17 MBps (133 MHz)
Dual Read Speed (SDR)
26 MBps (104 MHz)
20 MBps (80 MHz)
26 MBps (104 MHz)
Quad Read Speed (SDR)
52 MBps (104 MHz)
40 MBps (80 MHz)
52 MBps (104 MHz)
Fast Read Speed (DDR)
–
–
20 MBps (80 MHz)
Dual Read Speed (DDR)
–
–
40 MBps (80 MHz)
Quad Read Speed (DDR)
–
–
80 MBps (80 MHz)
256B
256B
512B
4 KB / 32 KB / 64 KB
64 KB / 256 KB
256 KB
Program Buffer Size
Erase Sector Size
Parameter Sector Size
Sector Erase Time (typ.)
4 KB
4 KB
–
30 ms (4 KB), 150 ms (64 kB)
500 ms (64 kB)
520 ms (256 kB)
Notes
1. 256B program page option only for 128-Mb and 256-Mb density FL-S devices.
2. FL-P column indicates FL129P MIO SPI device (for 128-Mb density).
3. 64 kB sector erase option only for 128-Mb/256-Mb density FL-P and FL-S devices.
4. FL-K family devices can erase 4-kB sectors in groups of 32 kB or 64 kB.
5. Refer to individual datasheets for further details.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 4 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 1. FL Generations Comparison (Continued)
Parameter
FL-K
FL-P
FL-S
Page Programming Time (typ.)
700 µs (256B)
1500 µs (256B)
340 µs (512B)
768B (3 x 256B)
506B
1024B
No
No
Yes
OTP
Advanced Sector Protection
Auto Boot Mode
No
No
Yes
Erase Suspend/Resume
Yes
No
Yes
Program Suspend/Resume
Yes
No
Yes
–40 °C to +85 °C
–40 °C to +85 °C / +105 °C
–40 °C to +85 °C / +105 °C
Operating Temperature
Notes
1. 256B program page option only for 128-Mb and 256-Mb density FL-S devices.
2. FL-P column indicates FL129P MIO SPI device (for 128-Mb density).
3. 64 kB sector erase option only for 128-Mb/256-Mb density FL-P and FL-S devices.
4. FL-K family devices can erase 4-kB sectors in groups of 32 kB or 64 kB.
5. Refer to individual datasheets for further details.
1.2.2
Known Differences from Prior Generations
1.2.2.1
Error Reporting
Prior generation FL memories either do not have error status bits or do not set them if program or erase is attempted on a protected
sector. The FL-S family does have error reporting status bits for program and erase operations. These can be set when there is an
internal failure to program or erase or when there is an attempt to program or erase a protected sector. In either case the program or
erase operation did not complete as requested by the command.
1.2.2.2
Secure Silicon Region (OTP)
The size and format (address map) of the One Time Program area is different from prior generations. The method for protecting each
portion of the OTP area is different. For additional details see Section 8.1 Secure Silicon Region (OTP) on page 56.
1.2.2.3
Configuration Register Freeze Bit
The configuration register Freeze bit CR1[0], locks the state of the Block Protection bits as in prior generations. In the FL-S family it
also locks the state of the configuration register TBPARM bit CR1[2], TBPROT bit CR1[5], and the Secure Silicon Region (OTP) area.
1.2.2.4
Sector Erase Commands
The command for erasing an 8-KB area (two 4-KB sectors) is not supported.
The command for erasing a 4-KB sector is not supported in the 512-Mb density FL-S device.
The erase command for 64-KB sectors is not supported in the 512-Mb density FL-S device.
1.2.2.5
Deep Power-Down
The Deep Power Down (DPD) function is not supported in FL-S family devices.
The legacy DPD (B9h) command code is instead used to enable legacy SPI memory controllers, that can issue the former DPD
command, to access a new bank address register. The bank address register allows SPI memory controllers that do not support more
than 24 bits of address, the ability to provide higher order address bits for commands, as needed to access the larger address space
of the 512-Mb density FL-S device. For additional information see Section 7.1.1 Extended Address on page 44.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 5 of 136
S25FL512S
1.2.2.6
New Features
The FL-S family introduces several new features to SPI category memories:
■
Extended address for access to higher memory density.
■
AutoBoot for simpler access to boot code following power up.
■
Enhanced High Performance read commands using mode bits to eliminate the overhead of SIO instructions when repeating the
same type of read command.
■
Multiple options for initial read latency (number of dummy cycles) for faster initial access time or higher clock rate read commands.
■
DDR read commands for SIO, DIO, and QIO.
■
Automatic ECC for enhanced data integrity.
■
Advanced Sector Protection for individually controlling the protection of each sector. This is very similar to the Advanced Sector
Protection feature found in several other Cypress parallel interface NOR memory families.
1.3 Glossary
Command
All information transferred between the host system and memory during one period while CS# is low.
This includes the instruction (sometimes called an operation code or opcode) and any required
address, mode bits, latency cycles, or data.
DDP
(Dual Die Package)
Two die stacked within the same package to increase the memory capacity of a single package.
Often also referred to as a Multi-Chip Package (MCP).
DDR
(Double Data Rate)
When input and output are latched on every edge of SCK.
ECC
ECC Unit = 16 byte aligned and length data groups in the main Flash array and OTP array, each of
which has its own hidden ECC syndrome to enable error correction on each group.
Flash
The name for a type of Electrical Erase Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) that erases
large blocks of memory bits in parallel, making the erase operation much faster than early EEPROM.
High
A signal voltage level ≥ VIH or a logic level representing a binary one (1).
Instruction
The 8 bit code indicating the function to be performed by a command (sometimes called an
operation code or opcode). The instruction is always the first 8 bits transferred from host system to
the memory in any command.
Low
A signal voltage level VIL or a logic level representing a binary zero (0).
LSb
(Least Significant Bit)
Generally the right most bit, with the lowest order of magnitude value, within a group of bits of a
register or data value.
MSb
(Most Significant Bit)
Generally the left most bit, with the highest order of magnitude value, within a group of bits of a
register or data value.
LSB
(Least Significant Byte)
The right most byte, within a group of bytes.
MSB
(Most Significant Byte)
The left most bit, within a group of bytes.
Nonvolatile
No power is needed to maintain data stored in the memory.
OPN
(Ordering Part Number)
The alphanumeric string specifying the memory device type, density, package, factory nonvolatile
configuration, etc. used to select the desired device.
Page
512 bytes aligned and length group of data.
PCB
Printed Circuit Board.
Register Bit References
Are in the format: Register_name[bit_number] or Register_name[bit_range_MSb: bit_range_LSb].
SDR
(Single Data Rate)
When input is latched on the rising edge and output on the falling edge of SCK.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 6 of 136
S25FL512S
Sector
Erase unit size 256 KB.
Write
An operation that changes data within volatile or nonvolatile registers bits or nonvolatile flash
memory. When changing nonvolatile data, an erase and reprogramming of any unchanged
nonvolatile data is done, as part of the operation, such that the nonvolatile data is modified by the
write operation, in the same way that volatile data is modified – as a single operation. The
nonvolatile data appears to the host system to be updated by the single write command, without the
need for separate commands for erase and reprogram of adjacent, but unaffected data.
1.4 Other Resources
1.4.1
Cypress Flash Memory Roadmap
www.cypress.com/product-roadmaps/cypress-flash-memory-roadmap
1.4.2
Links to Software
www.cypress.com/software-and-drivers-cypress-flash-memory
1.4.3
Links to Application Notes
www.cypress.com/cypressappnotes
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 7 of 136
S25FL512S
Hardware Interface
Serial Peripheral Interface with Multiple Input / Output (SPI-MIO)
Many memory devices connect to their host system with separate parallel control, address, and data signals that require a large
number of signal connections and larger package size. The large number of connections increase power consumption due to so many
signals switching and the larger package increases cost.
The S25FL512S device reduces the number of signals for connection to the host system by serially transferring all control, address,
and data information over 4 to 6 signals. This reduces the cost of the memory package, reduces signal switching power, and either
reduces the host connection count or frees host connectors for use in providing other features.
The S25FL512S device uses the industry standard single bit Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) and also supports optional extension
commands for two bit (Dual) and four bit (Quad) wide serial transfers. This multiple width interface is called SPI Multi-I/O or SPI-MIO.
2. Signal Descriptions
2.1 Input/Output Summary
Table 2. Signal List
Signal Name
Type
RESET#
Input
Hardware Reset: Low = device resets and returns to standby state, ready to receive a
command. The signal has an internal pull-up resistor and may be left unconnected in the host
system if not used.
SCK
Input
Serial Clock.
CS#
Input
Chip Select.
SI / IO0
I/O
Serial Input for single bit data commands or IO0 for Dual or Quad commands.
SO / IO1
I/O
Serial Output for single bit data commands. IO1 for Dual or Quad commands.
WP# / IO2
I/O
Write Protect when not in Quad mode. IO2 in Quad mode. The signal has an internal pull-up
resistor and may be left unconnected in the host system if not used for Quad commands.
HOLD# / IO3
I/O
Hold (pause) serial transfer in single bit or Dual data commands. IO3 in Quad-I/O mode. The
signal has an internal pull-up resistor and may be left unconnected in the host system if not used
for Quad commands.
VCC
Supply
Core Power Supply.
VIO
Supply
Versatile I/O Power Supply.
VSS
Supply
Ground.
NC
Unused
Not Connected. No device internal signal is connected to the package connector nor is there
any future plan to use the connector for a signal. The connection may safely be used for routing
space for a signal on a Printed Circuit Board (PCB). However, any signal connected to an NC
must not have voltage levels higher than VIO.
Reserved
Reserved for Future Use. No device internal signal is currently connected to the package
connector but there is potential future use of the connector for a signal. It is recommended to not
use RFU connectors for PCB routing channels so that the PCB may take advantage of future
enhanced features in compatible footprint devices.
Reserved
Do Not Use. A device internal signal may be connected to the package connector. The
connection may be used by Cypress for test or other purposes and is not intended for connection
to any host system signal. Any DNU signal related function will be inactive when the signal is at
VIL. The signal has an internal pull-down resistor and may be left unconnected in the host system
or may be tied to VSS. Do not use these connections for PCB signal routing channels. Do not
connect any host system signal to this connection.
RFU
DNU
Description
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 8 of 136
S25FL512S
2.2 Address and Data Configuration
Traditional SPI single bit wide commands (Single or SIO) send information from the host to the memory only on the SI signal. Data
may be sent back to the host serially on the Serial Output (SO) signal.
Dual or Quad Output commands send information from the host to the memory only on the SI signal. Data will be returned to the host
as a sequence of bit pairs on IO0 and IO1 or four bit (nibble) groups on IO0, IO1, IO2, and IO3.
Dual or Quad Input/Output (I/O) commands send information from the host to the memory as bit pairs on IO0 and IO1 or four bit
(nibble) groups on IO0, IO1, IO2, and IO3. Data is returned to the host similarly as bit pairs on IO0 and IO1 or four bit (nibble) groups
on IO0, IO1, IO2, and IO3.
2.3 RESET#
The RESET# input provides a hardware method of resetting the device to standby state, ready for receiving a command. When
RESET# is driven to logic low (VIL) for at least a period of tRP, the device:
■
terminates any operation in progress,
■
tristates all outputs,
■
resets the volatile bits in the Configuration Register,
■
resets the volatile bits in the Status Registers,
■
resets the Bank Address Register to zero,
■
loads the Program Buffer with all ones,
■
reloads all internal configuration information necessary to bring the device to standby mode,
■
and resets the internal Control Unit to standby state.
RESET# causes the same initialization process as is performed when power comes up and requires tPU time.
RESET# may be asserted low at any time. To ensure data integrity any operation that was interrupted by a hardware reset should be
reinitiated once the device is ready to accept a command sequence.
When RESET# is first asserted Low, the device draws ICC1 (50 MHz value) during tPU. If RESET# continues to be held at VSS the
device draws CMOS standby current (ISB).
RESET# has an internal pull-up resistor and may be left unconnected in the host system if not used.
The RESET# input is not available on all packages options. When not available the RESET# input of the device is tied to the inactive
state, inside the package.
2.4 Serial Clock (SCK)
This input signal provides the synchronization reference for the SPI interface. Instructions, addresses, or data input are latched on
the rising edge of the SCK signal. Data output changes after the falling edge of SCK, in SDR commands, and after every edge in DDR
commands.
2.5 Chip Select (CS#)
The chip select signal indicates when a command for the device is in process and the other signals are relevant for the memory device.
When the CS# signal is at the logic high state, the device is not selected and all input signals are ignored and all output signals are
high impedance. Unless an internal Program, Erase or Write Registers (WRR) embedded operation is in progress, the device will be
in the Standby Power mode. Driving the CS# input to logic low state enables the device, placing it in the Active Power mode. After
Power-up, a falling edge on CS# is required prior to the start of any command.
2.6 Serial Input (SI) / I/O0
This input signal is used to transfer data serially into the device. It receives instructions, addresses, and data to be programmed.
Values are latched on the rising edge of serial SCK clock signal.
SI becomes I/O0 - an input and output during Dual and Quad commands for receiving instructions, addresses, and data to be
programmed (values latched on rising edge of serial SCK clock signal) as well as shifting out data (on the falling edge of SCK, in SDR
commands, and on every edge of SCK, in DDR commands).
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 9 of 136
S25FL512S
2.7 Serial Output (SO) / I/O1
This output signal is used to transfer data serially out of the device. Data is shifted out on the falling edge of the serial SCK clock signal.
SO becomes IO1 - an input and output during Dual and Quad commands for receiving addresses, and data to be programmed (values
latched on rising edge of serial SCK clock signal) as well as shifting out data (on the falling edge of SCK, in SDR commands, and on
every edge of SCK, in DDR commands).
2.8 Write Protect (WP#) / I/O2
When WP# is driven Low (VIL), during a WRR command and while the Status Register Write Disable (SRWD) bit of the Status Register
is set to a 1, it is not possible to write to the Status and Configuration Registers. This prevents any alteration of the Block Protect (BP2,
BP1, BP0) and TBPROT bits of the Status Register. As a consequence, all the data bytes in the memory area that are protected by
the Block Protect and TBPROT bits, are also hardware protected against data modification if WP# is Low during a WRR command.
The WP# function is not available when the Quad mode is enabled (CR[1]=1). The WP# function is replaced by IO2 for input and
output during Quad mode for receiving addresses, and data to be programmed (values are latched on rising edge of the SCK signal)
as well as shifting out data (on the falling edge of SCK, in SDR commands, and on every edge of SCK, in DDR commands).
WP# has an internal pull-up resistor; when unconnected, WP# is at VIH and may be left unconnected in the host system if not used
for Quad mode.
2.9 Hold (HOLD#) / I/O3
The Hold (HOLD#) signal is used to pause any serial communications with the device without deselecting the device or stopping the
serial clock.
To enter the Hold condition, the device must be selected by driving the CS# input to the logic low state. It is recommended that the
user keep the CS# input low state during the entire duration of the Hold condition. This is to ensure that the state of the interface logic
remains unchanged from the moment of entering the Hold condition. If the CS# input is driven to the logic high state while the device
is in the Hold condition, the interface logic of the device will be reset. To restart communication with the device, it is necessary to drive
HOLD# to the logic high state while driving the CS# signal into the logic low state. This prevents the device from going back into the
Hold condition.
The Hold condition starts on the falling edge of the Hold (HOLD#) signal, provided that this coincides with SCK being at the logic low
state. If the falling edge does not coincide with the SCK signal being at the logic low state, the Hold condition starts whenever the
SCK signal reaches the logic low state. Taking the HOLD# signal to the logic low state does not terminate any Write, Program or Erase
operation that is currently in progress.
During the Hold condition, SO is in high impedance and both the SI and SCK input are Don't Care.
The Hold condition ends on the rising edge of the Hold (HOLD#) signal, provided that this coincides with the SCK signal being at the
logic low state. If the rising edge does not coincide with the SCK signal being at the logic low state, the Hold condition ends whenever
the SCK signal reaches the logic low state.
The HOLD# function is not available when the Quad mode is enabled (CR1[1] =1). The Hold function is replaced by I/O3 for input and
output during Quad mode for receiving addresses, and data to be programmed (values are latched on rising edge of the SCK signal)
as well as shifting out data (on the falling edge of SCK, in SDR commands, and on every edge of SCK, in DDR commands).
The HOLD# signal has an internal pull-up resistor and may be left unconnected in the host system if not used for Quad mode.
Figure 1. HOLD Mode Operation
CS#
SCK
HOLD#
Hold Condition
Standard Use
SI_or_IO_(during_input)
Valid Input
SO_or_IO_(internal)
A
SO_or_IO_(external)
A
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Don't Care
Hold Condition
Non-standard Use
Valid Input
B
B
C
B
C
Don't Care
Valid Input
D
E
D
E
Page 10 of 136
S25FL512S
2.10 Core Voltage Supply (VCC)
VCC is the voltage source for all device internal logic. It is the single voltage used for all device internal functions including read,
program, and erase. The voltage may vary from 2.7V to 3.6V.
2.11 Versatile I/O Power Supply (VIO)
The Versatile I/O (VIO) supply is the voltage source for all device input receivers and output drivers and allows the host system to set
the voltage levels that the device tolerates on all inputs and drives on outputs (address, control, and I/O signals). The VIO range is
1.65V to VCC. VIO cannot be greater than VCC.
For example, a VIO of 1.65 V - 3.6 V allows for I/O at the 1.8 V, 2.5 V or 3 V levels, driving and receiving signals to and from other
1.8 V, 2.5 V or 3 V devices on the same data bus. VIO may be tied to VCC so that interface signals operate at the same voltage as the
core of the device. VIO is not available in all package options, when not available the VIO supply is tied to VCC internal to the package.
During the rise of power supplies the VIO supply voltage must remain less than or equal to the VCC supply voltage.
This supply is not available in all package options. For a backward compatible with the SO16 package, the VIO supply is tied to VCC
inside the package; thus, the I/O will function at VCC level.
2.12 Supply and Signal Ground (VSS)
VSS is the common voltage drain and ground reference for the device core, input signal receivers, and output drivers.
2.13 Not Connected (NC)
No device internal signal is connected to the package connector nor is there any future plan to use the connector for a signal. The
connection may safely be used for routing space for a signal on a Printed Circuit Board (PCB). However, any signal connected to an
NC must not have voltage levels higher than VIO.
2.14 Reserved for Future Use (RFU)
No device internal signal is currently connected to the package connector but is there potential future use of the connector. It is
recommended to not use RFU connectors for PCB routing channels so that the PCB may take advantage of future enhanced features
in compatible footprint devices.
2.15 Do Not Use (DNU)
A device internal signal may be connected to the package connector. The connection may be used by Cypress for test or other
purposes and is not intended for connection to any host system signal. Any DNU signal related function will be inactive when the
signal is at VIL. The signal has an internal pull-down resistor and may be left unconnected in the host system or may be tied to VSS.
Do not use these connections for PCB signal routing channels. Do not connect any host system signal to these connections.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 11 of 136
S25FL512S
2.16 Block Diagrams
Figure 2. Bus Master and Memory Devices on the SPI Bus — Single Bit Data Path
HOLD#
HOLD#
WP#
WP#
SI
SO
SI
SO
SCK
CS2#
CS1#
SCK
CS2#
CS1#
FL-S
Flash
FL-S
Flash
SPI
Bus Master
Figure 3. Bus Master and Memory Devices on the SPI Bus — Dual Bit Data Path
HOLD#
HOLD#
WP#
WP#
IO1
IO1
IO0
IO0
SCK
CS2#
CS1#
SCK
CS2#
CS1#
FL-S
Flash
FL-S
Flash
SPI
Bus Master
Figure 4. Bus Master and Memory Devices on the SPI Bus — Quad Bit Data Path
IO3
IO3
IO2
IO1
IO0
SCK
CS2#
CS1#
SPI
Bus Master
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
IO2
IO1
IO0
SCK
CS2#
CS1#
FL-S
Flash
FL-S
Flash
Page 12 of 136
S25FL512S
3.
Signal Protocols
3.1 SPI Clock Modes
3.1.1
Single Data Rate (SDR)
The S25FL512S device can be driven by an embedded microcontroller (bus master) in either of the two following clocking modes.
■
Mode 0 with Clock Polarity (CPOL) = 0 and, Clock Phase (CPHA) = 0
■
Mode 3 with CPOL = 1 and, CPHA = 1
For these two modes, input data into the device is always latched in on the rising edge of the SCK signal and the output data is always
available from the falling edge of the SCK clock signal.
The difference between the two modes is the clock polarity when the bus master is in standby mode and not transferring any data.
■
SCK will stay at logic low state with CPOL = 0, CPHA = 0
■
SCK will stay at logic high state with CPOL = 1, CPHA = 1
Figure 5. SPI SDR Modes Supported
CPOL=0_CPHA=0_SCK
CPOL=1_CPHA=1_SCK
CS#
SI
MSB
SO
MSB
Timing diagrams throughout the remainder of the document are generally shown as both mode 0 and 3 by showing SCK as both high
and low at the fall of CS#. In some cases a timing diagram may show only mode 0 with SCK low at the fall of CS#. In such a case,
mode 3 timing simply means clock is high at the fall of CS# so no SCK rising edge set up or hold time to the falling edge of CS# is
needed for mode 3.
SCK cycles are measured (counted) from one falling edge of SCK to the next falling edge of SCK. In mode 0 the beginning of the first
SCK cycle in a command is measured from the falling edge of CS# to the first falling edge of SCK because SCK is already low at the
beginning of a command.
3.1.2
Double Data Rate (DDR)
Mode 0 and Mode 3 are also supported for DDR commands. In DDR commands, the instruction bits are always latched on the rising
edge of clock, the same as in SDR commands. However, the address and input data that follow the instruction are latched on both
the rising and falling edges of SCK. The first address bit is latched on the first rising edge of SCK following the falling edge at the end
of the last instruction bit. The first bit of output data is driven on the falling edge at the end of the last access latency (dummy) cycle.
SCK cycles are measured (counted) in the same way as in SDR commands, from one falling edge of SCK to the next falling edge of
SCK. In mode 0 the beginning of the first SCK cycle in a command is measured from the falling edge of CS# to the first falling edge
of SCK because SCK is already low at the beginning of a command.
Figure 6. SPI DDR Modes Supported
CPOL=0_CPHA=0_SCK
CPOL=1_CPHA=1_SCK
CS#
Transfer_Phase
SI
Instruction
Inst. 7
Address
Inst. 0
A31 A30
Mode
A0
M7 M6
M0
SO
D0 D1
DLP7
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Read
Data
Dummy / DLP
DLP0
Page 13 of 136
S25FL512S
3.2 Command Protocol
All communication between the host system and S25FL512S memory device is in the form of units called commands.
All commands begin with an instruction that selects the type of information transfer or device operation to be performed. Commands
may also have an address, instruction modifier, latency period, data transfer to the memory, or data transfer from the memory. All
instruction, address, and data information is transferred serially between the host system and memory device.
All instructions are transferred from host to memory as a single bit serial sequence on the SI signal.
Single bit wide commands may provide an address or data sent only on the SI signal. Data may be sent back to the host serially on
the SO signal.
Dual or Quad Output commands provide an address sent to the memory only on the SI signal. Data will be returned to the host as a
sequence of bit pairs on I/O0 and I/O1 or four bit (nibble) groups on I/O0, I/O1, I/O2, and I/O3.
Dual or Quad Input/Output (I/O) commands provide an address sent from the host as bit pairs on I/O0 and I/O1 or, four-bit (nibble)
groups on I/O0, I/O1, I/O2, and I/O3. Data is returned to the host similarly as bit pairs on I/O0 and I/O1 or, four bit (nibble) groups on
I/O0, I/O1, I/O2, and I/O3.
Commands are structured as follows:
■
Each command begins with CS# going low and ends with CS# returning high. The memory device is selected by the host driving
the Chip Select (CS#) signal low throughout a command.
■
The serial clock (SCK) marks the transfer of each bit or group of bits between the host and memory.
■
Each command begins with an 8-bit (byte) instruction. The instruction is always presented only as a single bit serial sequence on
the Serial Input (SI) signal with one bit transferred to the memory device on each SCK rising edge. The instruction selects the type
of information transfer or device operation to be performed.
■
The instruction may be stand alone or may be followed by address bits to select a location within one of several address spaces in
the device. The instruction determines the address space used. The address may be either a 24-bit or a 32-bit byte boundary,
address. The address transfers occur on SCK rising edge, in SDR commands, or on every SCK edge, in DDR commands.
■
The width of all transfers following the instruction are determined by the instruction sent. Following transfers may continue to be
single bit serial on only the SI or Serial Output (SO) signals, they may be done in 2-bit groups per (dual) transfer on the I/O0 and
I/O1 signals, or they may be done in 4-bit groups per (quad) transfer on the I/O0-I/O3 signals. Within the dual or quad groups the
least significant bit is on I/O0. More significant bits are placed in significance order on each higher numbered I/O signal. Single bits
or parallel bit groups are transferred in most to least significant bit order.
■
Some instructions send an instruction modifier called mode bits, following the address, to indicate that the next command will be of
the same type with an implied, rather than an explicit, instruction. The next command thus does not provide an instruction byte, only
a new address and mode bits. This reduces the time needed to send each command when the same command type is repeated in
a sequence of commands. The mode bit transfers occur on SCK rising edge, in SDR commands, or on every SCK edge, in DDR
commands.
■
The address or mode bits may be followed by write data to be stored in the memory device or by a read latency period before read
data is returned to the host.
■
Write data bit transfers occur on SCK rising edge, in SDR commands, or on every SCK edge, in DDR commands.
■
SCK continues to toggle during any read access latency period. The latency may be zero to several SCK cycles (also referred to
as dummy cycles). At the end of the read latency cycles, the first read data bits are driven from the outputs on SCK falling edge at
the end of the last read latency cycle. The first read data bits are considered transferred to the host on the following SCK rising
edge. Each following transfer occurs on the next SCK rising edge, in SDR commands, or on every SCK edge, in DDR commands.
■
If the command returns read data to the host, the device continues sending data transfers until the host takes the CS# signal high.
The CS# signal can be driven high after any transfer in the read data sequence. This will terminate the command.
■
At the end of a command that does not return data, the host drives the CS# input high. The CS# signal must go high after the eighth
bit, of a stand alone instruction or, of the last write data byte that is transferred. That is, the CS# signal must be driven high when
the number of clock cycles after CS# signal was driven low is an exact multiple of eight cycles. If the CS# signal does not go high
exactly at the eight SCK cycle boundary of the instruction or write data, the command is rejected and not executed.
■
All instruction, address, and mode bits are shifted into the device with the Most Significant Bits (MSb) first. The data bits are shifted
in and out of the device MSb first. All data is transferred in byte units with the lowest address byte sent first. Following bytes of data
are sent in lowest to highest byte address order i.e. the byte address increments.
■
All attempts to read the flash memory array during a program, erase, or a write cycle (embedded operations) are ignored. The
embedded operation will continue to execute without any affect. A very limited set of commands are accepted during an embedded
operation. These are discussed in the individual command descriptions.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 14 of 136
S25FL512S
■
Depending on the command, the time for execution varies. A command to read status information from an executing command is
available to determine when the command completes execution and whether the command was successful.
3.2.1
Command Sequence Examples
Figure 7. Stand Alone Instruction Command
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Phase
Instruction
Figure 8. Single Bit Wide Input Command
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Phase
Instruction
Input Data
Figure 9. Single Bit Wide Output Command
CS#
SCK
SI
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SO
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Phase
Instruction
Data 1
Data 2
Figure 10. Single Bit Wide I/O Command without Latency
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4 3
2
1 0 31
1 0
SO
7
Instruction
Phase
Address
6 5
4 3 2
Data 1
1
0
7 6
5
4 3 2 1 0
Data 2
Figure 11. Single Bit Wide I/O Command with Latency
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4 3
2
1 0 31
1 0
SO
Phase
7 6
Instruction
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Address
Dummy Cycles
5
4 3 2 1 0
Data 1
Page 15 of 136
S25FL512S
Figure 12. Dual Output Command
CS#
SCK
IO0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
IO1
Phase
Instruction
30 28 26
0
6 4 2 0 6 4 2 0
31 29 27
1
7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1
Address
6 Dummy
Data 1
Data 2
Figure 13. Quad Output Command without Latency
CS#
SCK
IO0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 31
1 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4
IO1
5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5
IO2
6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6
IO3
7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7
Phase
Instruction
Address
Data 1 Data 2 Data 3
Data 4
Data 5 ...
Figure 14. Dual I/O Command
CS#
SCK
IO0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 30
IO1
31
Instruction
Phase
2
0
6
3 1
Address
7
Dummy
4
2
0
6
5 3
Data 1
1
7
4
2
0
5 3
Data 2
1
Figure 15. Quad I/O Command
CS#
SCK
IO0
0 28
4
0
4
4
0
4
0
4
0
4
0
IO1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
29
5
1
5
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
IO2
30
6
2
6
6
2
6
2
6
2
6
2
3
7
3
7
3
7 3
D4
IO3
31
Instruction
Phase
7 3 7
Address Mode
7
Dummy
D1
D2
D3
Figure 16. DDR Fast Read with EHPLC = 00b
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
3130
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SO
Phase
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Instruction
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Address
Mode
Dummy
Data 1
Data 2
Page 16 of 136
S25FL512S
Figure 17. DDR Dual I/O Read with EHPLC = 01b and DLP
CS#
SCK
IO0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
IO1
Instruction
Phase
0
30 28
0
6
4
2
0
7 6
5 4
3
2
1 0
6
4
2
0
6
31 29
1
7
5
3
1
7 6
5 4
3
2
1 0
7
5
3
1
7
Address
Mode
Dum
DLP
Data 1
Figure 18. DDR Quad I/O Read
CS#
SCK
IO0
2824201612 8
4 0 40
7 65 4 3 2 1 0 4 0 40
IO1
2925211713 9
5 1 51
7 65 4 3 2 1 0 5 1 51
IO2
302622181410 6
2 62
7 65 4 3 2 1 0 6 2 62
IO3
312723191511 7
3 73
7 65 4 3 2 1 0 7 3 73
Phase
7
6
5
4
3
Instruction
2
1
0
Address
Mode
Dummy
DLP
D1 D2
Additional sequence diagrams, specific to each command, are provided in Section 9. Commands on page 62.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 17 of 136
S25FL512S
3.3 Interface States
This section describes the input and output signal levels as related to the SPI interface behavior.
Table 3. Interface States Summary
SO /
I/O1
SI /
I/O0
X
Z
X
X
X
Z
X
X
X
X
Z
X
X
X
X
X
Z
X
HH
X
HH
X
X
Z
X
≥ VIO (min)
≤ VCC
HH
HT
HL
HH
HV
Z
HV
≥ VCC (min)
≥ VIO (min)
≤ VCC
HH
HV or HT
HL
HL
X
X
X
Single Input Cycle
Host to Memory Transfer
≥ VCC (min)
≥ VIO (min)
≤ VCC
HH
HT
HL
HH
X
Z
HV
Single Latency (Dummy)
Cycle
≥ VCC (min)
≥ VIO (min)
≤ VCC
HH
HT
HL
HH
X
Z
X
Single Output Cycle
Memory to Host Transfer
≥ VCC (min)
≥ VIO (min)
≤ VCC
HH
HT
HL
HH
X
MV
X
Dual Input Cycle
Host to Memory Transfer
≥ VCC (min)
≥ VIO (min)
≤ VCC
HH
HT
HL
HH
X
HV
HV
Dual Latency (Dummy)
Cycle
≥ VCC (min)
≥ VIO (min)
≤ VCC
HH
HT
HL
HH
X
X
X
Dual Output Cycle
Memory to Host Transfer
≥ VCC (min)
≥ VIO (min)
≤ VCC
HH
HT
HL
HH
X
MV
MV
QPP Address Input
Cycle
Host to Memory Transfer
≥ VCC (min)
≥ VIO (min)
≤ VCC
HH
HT
HL
X
X
X
HV
Quad Input Cycle
Host to Memory Transfer
≥ VCC (min)
≥ VIO (min)
≤ VCC
HH
HT
HL
HV
HV
HV
HV
Quad Latency (Dummy)
Cycle
≥ VCC (min)
≥ VIO (min)
≤ VCC
HH
HT
HL
X
X
X
X
Quad Output Cycle
Memory to Host Transfer
≥ VCC (min)
≥ VIO (min)
≤ VCC
HH
HT
HL
MV
MV
MV
MV
DDR Single Input Cycle
Host to Memory Transfer
≥ VCC (min)
≥ VIO (min)
≤ VCC
HH
HT
HL
X
X
X
HV
DDR Dual Input Cycle
Host to Memory Transfer
≥ VCC (min)
≥ VIO (min)
≤ VCC
HH
HT
HL
X
X
HV
HV
DDR Quad Input Cycle
Host to Memory Transfer
≥ VCC (min)
≥ VIO (min)
≤ VCC
HH
HT
HL
HV
HV
HV
HV
DDR Latency (Dummy)
Cycle
≥ VCC (min)
≥ VIO (min)
≤ VCC
HH
HT
HL
DDR Single Output
Cycle
Memory to Host Transfer
≥ VCC (min)
≥ VIO (min)
≤ VCC
HH
HT
HL
Interface State
/ WP# / z
CS# HOLD#
I/O3
I/O2
VCC
VIO
RESET#
SCK
< VCC (low)
VCC
X
X
X
X
< VCC (cut-off)
VCC
X
X
X
Power-On (Cold) Reset
≥ VCC (min)
≥ VIO (min)
≤ VCC
X
X
Hardware (Warm) Reset
≥ VCC (min)
≥ VIO (min)
≤ VCC
HL
Interface Standby
≥ VCC (min)
≥ VIO (min)
≤ VCC
Instruction Cycle
≥ VCC (min)
Hold Cycle
Power-Off
Low Power
Hardware Data
Protection
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
MV or Z MV or Z MVZ or MVZ or
Z
Z
MV
X
Page 18 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 3. Interface States Summary (Continued)
/ WP# / z
CS# HOLD#
I/O3
I/O2
Interface State
VCC
VIO
RESET#
SCK
DDR Dual Output Cycle
Memory to Host Transfer
≥ VCC (min)
≥ VIO (min)
≤ VCC
HH
HT
HL
Z
DDR Quad Output Cycle
Memory to Host Transfer
≥ VCC (min)
≥ VIO (min)
≤ VCC
HH
HT
HL
MV
SO /
I/O1
SI /
I/O0
Z
MV
MV
MV
MV
MV
Legend:
Z = no driver - floating signal
HL = Host driving VIL
HH = Host driving VIH
HV = either HL or HH
X = HL or HH or Z
HT = Toggling between HL and HH
ML = Memory driving VIL
MH = Memory driving VIH
MV = either ML or MH
3.3.1
Power-Off
When the core supply voltage is at or below the VCC (low) voltage, the device is considered to be powered off. The device does not
react to external signals, and is prevented from performing any program or erase operation.
3.3.2
Low Power Hardware Data Protection
When VCC is less than VCC (cut-off) the memory device will ignore commands to ensure that program and erase operations can not
start when the core supply voltage is out of the operating range.
3.3.3
Power-On (Cold) Reset
When the core voltage supply remains at or below the VCC (low) voltage for tPD time, then rises to VCC (Minimum) the device will
begin its Power-On Reset (POR) process. POR continues until the end of tPU. During tPU the device does not react to external input
signals nor drive any outputs. Following the end of t PU the device transitions to the Interface Standby state and can accept
commands. For additional information on POR, see Section 5.3.1 Power-On (Cold) Reset on page 30.
3.3.4
Hardware (Warm) Reset
Some of the device package options provide a RESET# input. When RESET# is driven low for tRP time the device starts the
hardware reset process. The process continues for tRPH time. Following the end of both tRPH and the reset hold time following the
rise of RESET# (tRH) the device transitions to the Interface Standby state and can accept commands. For additional information on
hardware reset, see Section 28 POR followed by Hardware Reset on page 30.
3.3.5
Interface Standby
When CS# is high the SPI interface is in standby state. Inputs other than RESET# are ignored. The interface waits for the beginning
of a new command. The next interface state is Instruction Cycle when CS# goes low to begin a new command.
While in interface standby state the memory device draws standby current (ISB) if no embedded algorithm is in progress. If an
embedded algorithm is in progress, the related current is drawn until the end of the algorithm when the entire device returns to
standby current draw.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 19 of 136
S25FL512S
3.3.6
Instruction Cycle
When the host drives the MSb of an instruction and CS# goes low, on the next rising edge of SCK the device captures the MSb of
the instruction that begins the new command. On each following rising edge of SCK the device captures the next lower significance
bit of the 8 bit instruction. The host keeps RESET# high, CS# low, HOLD# high, and drives Write Protect (WP#) signal as needed for
the instruction. However, WP# is only relevant during instruction cycles of a WRR command and is otherwise ignored.
Each instruction selects the address space that is operated on and the transfer format used during the remainder of the command.
The transfer format may be Single, Dual output, Quad output, Dual I/O, Quad I/O, DDR Single I/O, DDR Dual I/O, or DDR Quad I/O.
The expected next interface state depends on the instruction received.
Some commands are stand alone, needing no address or data transfer to or from the memory. The host returns CS# high after the
rising edge of SCK for the eighth bit of the instruction in such commands. The next interface state in this case is Interface Standby.
3.3.7
Hold
When Quad mode is not enabled (CR[1]=0) the HOLD# / I/O3 signal is used as the HOLD# input. The host keeps RESET# high,
HOLD# low, SCK may be at a valid level or continue toggling, and CS# is low. When HOLD# is low a command is paused, as though
SCK were held low. SI / I/O0 and SO / I/O1 ignore the input level when acting as inputs and are high impedance when acting as
outputs during hold state. Whether these signals are input or output depends on the command and the point in the command
sequence when HOLD# is asserted low.
When HOLD# returns high the next state is the same state the interface was in just before HOLD# was asserted low.
When Quad mode is enabled the HOLD# / I/O3 signal is used as I/O3.
During DDR commands the HOLD# and WP# inputs are ignored.
3.3.8
Single Input Cycle - Host to Memory Transfer
Several commands transfer information after the instruction on the single serial input (SI) signal from host to the memory device. The
dual output, and quad output commands send address to the memory using only SI but return read data using the I/O signals. The
host keeps RESET# high, CS# low, HOLD# high, and drives SI as needed for the command. The memory does not drive the Serial
Output (SO) signal.
The expected next interface state depends on the instruction. Some instructions continue sending address or data to the memory
using additional Single Input Cycles. Others may transition to Single Latency, or directly to Single, Dual, or Quad Output.
3.3.9
Single Latency (Dummy) Cycle
Read commands may have zero to several latency cycles during which read data is read from the main flash memory array before
transfer to the host. The number of latency cycles are determined by the Latency Code in the configuration register (CR[7:6]). During
the latency cycles, the host keeps RESET# high, CS# low, and HOLD# high. The Write Protect (WP#) signal is ignored. The host
may drive the SI signal during these cycles or the host may leave SI floating. The memory does not use any data driven on SI / I/O0
or other I/O signals during the latency cycles. In dual or quad read commands, the host must stop driving the I/O signals on the
falling edge at the end of the last latency cycle. It is recommended that the host stop driving I/O signals during latency cycles so that
there is sufficient time for the host drivers to turn off before the memory begins to drive at the end of the latency cycles. This prevents
driver conflict between host and memory when the signal direction changes. The memory does not drive the Serial Output (SO) or
I/O signals during the latency cycles.
The next interface state depends on the command structure, that is the number of latency cycles, and whether the read is single,
dual, or quad width.
3.3.10 Single Output Cycle - Memory to Host Transfer
Several commands transfer information back to the host on the single Serial Output (SO) signal. The host keeps RESET# high, CS#
low, and HOLD# high. The Write Protect (WP#) signal is ignored. The memory ignores the Serial Input (SI) signal. The memory
drives SO with data.
The next interface state continues to be Single Output Cycle until the host returns CS# to high ending the command.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 20 of 136
S25FL512S
3.3.11
Dual Input Cycle - Host to Memory Transfer
The Read Dual I/O command transfers two address or mode bits to the memory in each cycle. The host keeps RESET# high, CS#
low, HOLD# high. The Write Protect (WP#) signal is ignored. The host drives address on SI / I/O0 and SO / I/O1.
The next interface state following the delivery of address and mode bits is a Dual Latency Cycle if there are latency cycles needed or
Dual Output Cycle if no latency is required.
3.3.12 Dual Latency (Dummy) Cycle
Read commands may have zero to several latency cycles during which read data is read from the main flash memory array before
transfer to the host. The number of latency cycles are determined by the Latency Code in the configuration register (CR[7:6]). During
the latency cycles, the host keeps RESET# high, CS# low, and HOLD# high. The Write Protect (WP#) signal is ignored. The host
may drive the SI / I/O0 and SO / I/O1 signals during these cycles or the host may leave SI / I/O0 and SO / I/O1 floating. The memory
does not use any data driven on SI / I/O0 and SO / I/O1 during the latency cycles. The host must stop driving SI / I/O0 and SO / I/O1
on the falling edge at the end of the last latency cycle. It is recommended that the host stop driving them during all latency cycles so
that there is sufficient time for the host drivers to turn off before the memory begins to drive at the end of the latency cycles. This
prevents driver conflict between host and memory when the signal direction changes. The memory does not drive the SI / I/O0 and
SO / I/O1 signals during the latency cycles.
The next interface state following the last latency cycle is a Dual Output Cycle.
3.3.13 Dual Output Cycle - Memory to Host Transfer
The Read Dual Output and Read Dual I/O return data to the host two bits in each cycle. The host keeps RESET# high, CS# low, and
HOLD# high. The Write Protect (WP#) signal is ignored. The memory drives data on the SI / I/O0 and SO / I/O1 signals during the
dual output cycles.
The next interface state continues to be Dual Output Cycle until the host returns CS# to high ending the command.
3.3.14 QPP or QOR Address Input Cycle
The Quad Page Program and Quad Output Read commands send address to the memory only on I/O0. The other I/O signals are
ignored because the device must be in Quad mode for these commands thus the Hold and Write Protect features are not active. The
host keeps RESET# high, CS# low, and drives I/O0.
For QPP the next interface state following the delivery of address is the Quad Input Cycle.
For QOR the next interface state following address is a Quad Latency Cycle if there are latency cycles needed or Quad Output
Cycle if no latency is required.
3.3.15 Quad Input Cycle - Host to Memory Transfer
The Quad I/O Read command transfers four address or mode bits to the memory in each cycle. The Quad Page Program command
transfers four data bits to the memory in each cycle. The host keeps RESET# high, CS# low, and drives the I/O signals.
For Quad I/O Read the next interface state following the delivery of address and mode bits is a Quad Latency Cycle if there are
latency cycles needed or Quad Output Cycle if no latency is required. For Quad Page Program the host returns CS# high following
the delivery of data to be programmed and the interface returns to standby state.
3.3.16 Quad Latency (Dummy) Cycle
Read commands may have zero to several latency cycles during which read data is read from the main flash memory array before
transfer to the host. The number of latency cycles are determined by the Latency Code in the configuration register (CR[7:6]). During
the latency cycles, the host keeps RESET# high, CS# low. The host may drive the I/O signals during these cycles or the host may
leave the I/O floating. The memory does not use any data driven on I/O during the latency cycles. The host must stop driving the I/O
signals on the falling edge at the end of the last latency cycle. It is recommended that the host stop driving them during all latency
cycles so that there is sufficient time for the host drivers to turn off before the memory begins to drive at the end of the latency
cycles. This prevents driver conflict between host and memory when the signal direction changes. The memory does not drive the
I/O signals during the latency cycles.
The next interface state following the last latency cycle is a Quad Output Cycle.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 21 of 136
S25FL512S
3.3.17 Quad Output Cycle - Memory to Host Transfer
The Quad Output Read and Quad I/O Read return data to the host four bits in each cycle. The host keeps RESET# high, and CS#
low. The memory drives data on I/O0-I/O3 signals during the Quad output cycles.
The next interface state continues to be Quad Output Cycle until the host returns CS# to high ending the command.
3.3.18 DDR Single Input Cycle - Host to Memory Transfer
The DDR Fast Read command sends address, and mode bits to the memory only on the I/O0 signal. One bit is transferred on the
rising edge of SCK and one bit on the falling edge in each cycle. The host keeps RESET# high, and CS# low. The other I/O signals
are ignored by the memory.
The next interface state following the delivery of address and mode bits is a DDR Latency Cycle.
3.3.19 DDR Dual Input Cycle - Host to Memory Transfer
The DDR Dual I/O Read command sends address, and mode bits to the memory only on the I/O0 and I/O1 signals. Two bits are
transferred on the rising edge of SCK and two bits on the falling edge in each cycle. The host keeps RESET# high, and CS# low.
The I/O2 and I/O3 signals are ignored by the memory.
The next interface state following the delivery of address and mode bits is a DDR Latency Cycle.
3.3.20 DDR Quad Input Cycle - Host to Memory Transfer
The DDR Quad I/O Read command sends address, and mode bits to the memory on all the I/O signals. Four bits are transferred on
the rising edge of SCK and four bits on the falling edge in each cycle. The host keeps RESET# high, and CS# low.
The next interface state following the delivery of address and mode bits is a DDR Latency Cycle.
3.3.21 DDR Latency Cycle
DDR Read commands may have one to several latency cycles during which read data is read from the main flash memory array
before transfer to the host. The number of latency cycles are determined by the Latency Code in the configuration register (CR[7:6]).
During the latency cycles, the host keeps RESET# high and CS# low. The host may not drive the I/O signals during these cycles. So
that there is sufficient time for the host drivers to turn off before the memory begins to drive. This prevents driver conflict between
host and memory when the signal direction changes. The memory has an option to drive all the I/O signals with a Data Learning
Pattern (DLP) during the last 4 latency cycles. The DLP option should not be enabled when there are fewer than five latency cycles
so that there is at least one cycle of high impedance for turn around of the I/O signals before the memory begins driving the DLP.
When there are more than 4 cycles of latency the memory does not drive the I/O signals until the last four cycles of latency.
The next interface state following the last latency cycle is a DDR Single, Dual, or Quad Output Cycle, depending on the instruction.
3.3.22 DDR Single Output Cycle - Memory to Host Transfer
The DDR Fast Read command returns bits to the host only on the SO / I/O1 signal. One bit is transferred on the rising edge of SCK
and one bit on the falling edge in each cycle. The host keeps RESET# high, and CS# low. The other I/O signals are not driven by the
memory.
The next interface state continues to be DDR Single Output Cycle until the host returns CS# to high ending the command.
3.3.23 DDR Dual Output Cycle - Memory to Host Transfer
The DDR Dual I/O Read command returns bits to the host only on the I/O0 and I/O1 signals. Two bits are transferred on the rising
edge of SCK and two bits on the falling edge in each cycle. The host keeps RESET# high, and CS# low. The I/O2 and I/O3 signals
are not driven by the memory.
The next interface state continues to be DDR Dual Output Cycle until the host returns CS# to high ending the command.
3.3.24 DDR Quad Output Cycle - Memory to Host Transfer
The DDR Quad I/O Read command returns bits to the host on all the I/O signals. Four bits are transferred on the rising edge of SCK
and four bits on the falling edge in each cycle. The host keeps RESET# high, and CS# low.
The next interface state continues to be DDR Quad Output Cycle until the host returns CS# to high ending the command.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 22 of 136
S25FL512S
3.4 Configuration Register Effects on the Interface
The configuration register bits 7 and 6 (CR1[7:6]) select the latency code for all read commands. The latency code selects the
number of mode bit and latency cycles for each type of instruction.
The configuration register bit 1 (CR1[1]) selects whether Quad mode is enabled to ignore HOLD# and WP# and allow Quad Page
Program, Quad Output Read, and Quad I/O Read commands. Quad mode must also be selected to allow Read DDR Quad I/O
commands.
3.5 Data Protection
Some basic protection against unintended changes to stored data are provided and controlled purely by the hardware design. These
are described below. Other software managed protection methods are discussed in the software section (page 44) of this document.
3.5.1
Power-Up
When the core supply voltage is at or below the VCC (low) voltage, the device is considered to be powered off. The device does not
react to external signals, and is prevented from performing any program or erase operation. Program and erase operations continue
to be prevented during the Power-on Reset (POR) because no command is accepted until the exit from POR to the Interface
Standby state.
3.5.2
Low Power
When VCC is less than VCC (cut-off) the memory device will ignore commands to ensure that program and erase operations can not
start when the core supply voltage is out of the operating range.
3.5.3
Clock Pulse Count
The device verifies that all program, erase, and Write Registers (WRR) commands consist of a clock pulse count that is a multiple of
eight before executing them. A command not having a multiple of 8 clock pulse counts is ignored and no error status is set for the
command.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 23 of 136
S25FL512S
4.
Electrical Specifications
4.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 4. Absolute Maximum Ratings
Storage Temperature Plastic Packages
–65°C to +150°C
Ambient Temperature with Power Applied
–65°C to +125°C
VCC
–0.5 V to +4.0 V
VIO
[6]
–0.5 V to +4.0 V
Input Voltage with Respect to Ground (VSS)
[7]
–0.5 V to +(VIO + 0.5 V)
[8]
100 mA
Output Short Circuit Current
Notes
6. VIO must always be less than or equal VCC + 200 mV.
7. See Section 4.3.3 Input Signal Overshoot on page 25 for allowed maximums during signal transition.
8. No more than one output may be shorted to ground at a time. Duration of the short circuit should not be greater than one second.
9. Stresses above those listed under Section 4 Absolute Maximum Ratings on page 24 may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only;
functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions above those indicated in the operational sections of this data sheet is not implied. Exposure of the
device to absolute maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
4.2 Thermal Resistance
Table 5. Thermal Resistance
Parameter
Theta JA
Description
SO3016
FAB024
FAC024
Unit
Thermal resistance
(junction to ambient)
29.6
33.6
33.6
°C/W
4.3 Operating Ranges
Operating ranges define those limits between which the functionality of the device is guaranteed.
4.3.1
Power Supply Voltages
Some package options provide access to a separate input and output buffer power supply called VIO. Packages which do not provide
the separate VIO connection, internally connect the device VIO to VCC. For these packages, the references to VIO are then also
references to VCC.
4.3.2
VCC
2.7V to 3.6V
VIO
1.65V to VCC +200 mV
Temperature Ranges
Parameter
Ambient Temperature
Symbol
TA
Device
Spec
Min
Max
Industrial (I)
–40
+85
Industrial Plus (V)
–40
+105
Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade 3 (A)
–40
+85
Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade 2 (B)
–40
+105
Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade 1 (M)
–40
+125
Unit
°C
Note
10. Industrial Plus operating and performance parameters will be determined by device characterization and may vary from standard industrial temperature range devices
as currently shown in this specification.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 24 of 136
S25FL512S
4.3.3
Input Signal Overshoot
During DC conditions, input or I/O signals should remain equal to or between VSS and VIO. During voltage transitions, inputs or I/Os
may overshoot VSS to –2.0V or overshoot to VIO +2.0V, for periods up to 20 ns.
Figure 19. Maximum Negative Overshoot Waveform
20 ns
20 ns
VIL
- 2.0V
20 ns
Figure 20. Maximum Positive Overshoot Waveform
20 ns
VIO + 2.0V
VIH
20 ns
20 ns
4.4 Power-Up and Power-Down
The device must not be selected at power-up or power-down (that is, CS# must follow the voltage applied on VCC) until VCC reaches
the correct value as follows:
■
VCC (min) at power-up, and then for a further delay of tPU
■
VSS at power-down
A simple pull-up resistor (generally of the order of 100 k) on Chip Select (CS#) can usually be used to insure safe and proper
power-up and power-down.
The device ignores all instructions until a time delay of tPU has elapsed after the moment that VCC rises above the minimum VCC
threshold. See Figure 21. However, correct operation of the device is not guaranteed if VCC returns below VCC (min) during tPU. No
command should be sent to the device until the end of tPU.
After power-up (tPU), the device is in Standby mode (not Deep Power Down mode), draws CMOS standby current (ISB), and the WEL
bit is reset.
During power-down or voltage drops below VCC (cut-off), the voltage must drop below VCC (low) for a period of tPD for the part to
initialize correctly on power-up. See Figure 22. If during a voltage drop the VCC stays above VCC (cut-off) the part will stay initialized
and will work correctly when VCC is again above VCC (min). In the event Power-on Reset (POR) did not complete correctly after power
up, the assertion of the RESET# signal will restart the POR process.
Normal precautions must be taken for supply rail decoupling to stabilize the VCC supply at the device. Each device in a system should
have the VCC rail decoupled by a suitable capacitor close to the package supply connection (this capacitor is generally of the order
of 0.1 µf).
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 25 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 6. Power-Up / Power-Down Voltage and Timing
Symbol
VCC (min)
VCC (cut-off)
VCC (low)
Min
Max
Unit
VCC (minimum operation voltage)
Parameter
2.7
–
V
VCC (Cut 0ff where re-initialization is needed)
2.4
–
V
VCC (low voltage for initialization to occur)
VCC (Low voltage for initialization to occur at embedded)
1.6
2.3
–
V
–
300
µs
10.0
–
µs
tPU
VCC (min) to Read operation
tPD
VCC (low) time
Figure 21. Power-Up
VCC
VCC(max)
VCC(min)
tPU
Full Device Access
Time
Figure 22. Power-Down and Voltage Drop
VCC
VCC(max)
No Device Access Allowed
VCC(min)
tPU
VCC(cut-off)
Device Access
Allowed
VCC(low)
tPD
Time
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 26 of 136
S25FL512S
4.5 DC Characteristics
Applicable within operating ranges.
Table 7. DC Characteristics
Symbol
Parameter
VIL
Input Low Voltage
Test Conditions
VIH
Input High Voltage
VOL
Output Low Voltage
IOL = 1.6 mA, VCC = VCC min
VOH
Output High Voltage
IOH = –0.1 mA
ILI
Input Leakage
Current
ILO
Min
Typ[11]
Max
Unit
-0.5
–
0.2 x VIO
V
0.7 x VIO
–
VIO+0.4
V
–
0.15 x VIO
V
0.85 x VIO
–
V
VCC = VCC Max, VIN = VIH or VIL
–
–
±2
µA
Output Leakage
Current
VCC = VCC Max, VIN = VIH or VIL
–
–
±2
µA
ICC1
Active Power Supply
Current (READ)
Serial SDR@50 MHz
Serial SDR@133 MHz
Quad SDR @ 80 MHz
Quad SDR @104 MHz
Quad DDR @ 66 MHz
Quad DDR @80 MHz
Outputs unconnected during read data
return[12]
–
–
ICC2
Active Power Supply
Current
(Page Program)
CS# = VIO
–
–
100
mA
ICC3
Active Power Supply
Current (WRR)
CS# = VIO
–
–
100
mA
ICC4
Active Power Supply
Current (SE)
CS# = VIO
–
–
100
mA
ICC5
Active Power Supply
Current (BE)
CS# = VIO
–
–
100
mA
ISB (Industrial)
Standby Current
RESET#, CS# = VIO; SI, SCK = VIO or
VSS, Industrial Temp
–
70
100
µA
ISB
(Industrial Plus)
Standby Current
RESET#, CS# = VIO; SI, SCK = VIO or
VSS, Industrial Plus Temp
–
70
300
µA
16
33/35[13]
50
61
75
90
mA
Notes
11. Typical values are at TAI = 25°C and VCC = VIO = 3V.
12. Output switching current is not included.
13. Industrial temperature range / Industrial Plus temperature range.
4.5.1
Active Power and Standby Power Modes
The device is enabled and in the Active Power mode when Chip Select (CS#) is Low. When CS# is high, the device is disabled, but
may still be in an Active Power mode until all program, erase, and write operations have completed. The device then goes into the
Standby Power mode, and power consumption drops to ISB.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 27 of 136
S25FL512S
5.
Timing Specifications
5.1 Key to Switching Waveforms
Figure 23. Waveform Element Meanings
Input
Valid at logic high or low
High Impedance
Any change permitted
Logic High Logic Low
Valid at logic high or low
High Impedance
Changing, state unknown
Logic High Logic Low
Symbol
Output
Figure 24. Input, Output, and Timing Reference Levels
Input Levels
Output Levels
VIO + 0.4V
0.7 x VIO
0.5 x VIO
0.2 x VIO
- 0.5V
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
0.85 x VIO
Timing Reference Level
0.15 x VIO
Page 28 of 136
S25FL512S
5.2 AC Test Conditions
Figure 25. Test Setup
Device
Under
Test
CL
Table 8. AC Measurement Conditions
Symbol
Parameter
Min
Max
Load Capacitance
Input Rise and Fall
Times
CL
Unit
30
15[17]
pF
–
2.4
ns
Input Pulse Voltage
0.2 x VIO to 0.8 VIO
V
Input Timing Ref Voltage
0.5 VIO
V
Output Timing Ref
Voltage
0.5 VIO
V
Notes
14. Output High-Z is defined as the point where data is no longer driven.
15. Input slew rate: 1.5 V/ns.
16. AC characteristics tables assume clock and data signals have the same slew rate (slope).
17. DDR Operation.
5.2.1
Capacitance Characteristics
Table 9. Capacitance
Parameter
Test Conditions
Min
Max
Unit
CIN
Input Capacitance (applies to SCK, CS#, RESET#)
1 MHz, TA = 25°C
–
8
pF
COUT
Output Capacitance (applies to All I/O)
1 MHz, TA = 25°C
–
8
pF
Note
18. For more information on capacitance, please consult the IBIS models.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 29 of 136
S25FL512S
5.3 Reset
5.3.1
Power-On (Cold) Reset
The device executes a Power-On Reset (POR) process until a time delay of tPU has elapsed after the moment that VCC rises above
the minimum VCC threshold. See Figure 21 on page 26, Table 6 on page 26, and Table 10 on page 31. The device must not be
selected (CS# to go high with VIO) during power-up (tPU), i.e. no commands may be sent to the device until the end of tPU. RESET#
is ignored during POR. If RESET# is low during POR and remains low through and beyond the end of tPU, CS# must remain high
until tRH after RESET# returns high. RESET# must return high for greater than tRS before returning low to initiate a hardware reset.
Figure 26. Reset Low at the End of POR
VCC
VIO
tPU
If RESET# is low at tPU end
RESET#
tRH
CS#
CS# must be high at tPU end
Figure 27. Reset High at the End of POR
VCC
VIO
tPU
RESET#
If RESET# is high at tPU end
tPU
CS# may stay high or go low at tPU end
CS#
Figure 28. POR followed by Hardware Reset
VCC
VIO
tPU
tRS
RESET#
tPU
CS#
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 30 of 136
S25FL512S
5.3.2
Hardware (Warm) Reset
When the RESET# input transitions from VIH to VIL the device will reset register states in the same manner as power-on reset but,
does not go through the full reset process that is performed during POR. The hardware reset process requires a period of tRPH to
complete. If the POR process did not complete correctly for any reason during power-up (tPU), RESET# going low will initiate the full
POR process instead of the hardware reset process and will require tPU to complete the POR process.
The RESET# input provides a hardware method of resetting the flash memory device to standby state.
■
RESET# must be high for tRS following tPU or tRPH, before going low again to initiate a hardware reset.
■
When RESET# is driven low for at least a minimum period of time (tRP), the device terminates any operation in progress, tri-states
all outputs, and ignores all read/write commands for the duration of tRPH. The device resets the interface to standby state.
■
If CS# is low at the time RESET# is asserted, CS# must return high during tRPH before it can be asserted low again after tRH.
■
Hardware Reset is only offered in 16-lead SOIC and BGA packages.
Figure 29. Hardware Reset
tRP
RESET#
Any prior reset
tRH
tRPH
tRH
tRS
tRPH
CS#
Table 10. Hardware Reset Parameters
Parameter
Description
Limit
Time
Unit
tRS
Reset Setup - Prior Reset end and RESET# high before RESET# low
Min
50
ns
tRPH
Reset Pulse Hold - RESET# low to CS# low
Min
35
µs
tRP
RESET# Pulse Width
Min
200
ns
tRH
Reset Hold - RESET# high before CS# low
Min
50
ns
Notes
19. RESET# Low is optional and ignored during Power-up (tPU). If Reset# is asserted during the end of tPU, the device will remain in the reset state and tRH will determine
when CS# may go Low.
20. Sum of tRP and tRH must be equal to or greater than tRPH.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 31 of 136
S25FL512S
5.4 SDR AC Characteristics
Table 11. AC Characteristics (Single Die Package, VIO = VCC 2.7V to 3.6V)
Symbol
Parameter
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
FSCK, R
SCK Clock Frequency for READ and 4READ instructions
DC
–
50
MHz
FSCK, C
SCK Clock Frequency for single commands as shown in Table 39
on page 64[24]
DC
–
133
MHz
FSCK, C
SCK Clock Frequency for the following dual and quad commands:
DOR, 4DOR, QOR, 4QOR, DIOR, 4DIOR, QIOR, 4QIOR
DC
–
104
MHz
SCK Clock Frequency for the QPP, 4QPP commands
DC
–
80
MHz
FSCK, QPP
1/ FSCK
–
tWH, tCH
Clock High Time[25]
45% PSCK
–
–
ns
tWL, tCL
[25]
45% PSCK
–
–
ns
Clock Rise Time (slew rate)
0.1
–
–
V/ns
Clock Fall Time (slew rate)
0.1
–
–
V/ns
tCS
CS# High Time (Read Instructions)
CS# High Time (Program/Erase)
10
50
–
–
ns
PSCK
tCRT, tCLCH
tCFT, tCHCL
SCK Clock Period
Clock Low Time
tCSS
CS# Active Setup Time (relative to SCK)
3
–
–
ns
tCSH
CS# Active Hold Time (relative to SCK)
3
–
–
ns
tSU
Data in Setup Time
1.5
–
3000[26]
ns
tHD
Data in Hold Time
2
–
tV
ns
8.0[22]
7.65[23]
6.5[24]
Clock Low to Output Valid
–
–
tHO
Output Hold Time
2
–
tDIS
Output Disable Time
0
–
8
ns
WP# Setup Time
20[21]
–
–
ns
100[21]
tWPS
ns
ns
tWPH
WP# Hold Time
–
–
ns
tHLCH
HOLD# Active Setup Time (relative to SCK)
3
–
–
ns
tCHHH
HOLD# Active Hold Time (relative to SCK)
3
–
–
ns
tHHCH
HOLD# Non Active Setup Time (relative to SCK)
3
–
–
ns
tCHHL
HOLD# Non Active Hold Time (relative to SCK)
3
–
–
ns
tHZ
HOLD# enable to Output Invalid
–
–
8
ns
tLZ
HOLD# disable to Output Valid
–
–
8
ns
Notes
21. Only applicable as a constraint for WRR instruction when SRWD is set to a 1.
22. Full VCC range (2.7 - 3.6V) and CL = 30 pF.
23. Regulated VCC range (3.0 - 3.6V) and CL = 30 pF.
24. Regulated VCC range (3.0 - 3.6V) and CL = 15 pF.
25. ±10% duty cycle is supported for frequencies 50 MHz.
26. Maximum value only applies during Program/Erase Suspend/Resume commands.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 32 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 12. AC Characteristics (Single Die Package, VIO 1.65V to 2.7V, VCC 2.7V to 3.6V)
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
FSCK, R
SCK Clock Frequency for READ, 4READ instructions
Parameter
DC
–
50
MHz
FSCK, C
SCK Clock Frequency for all others[29]
DC
–
66
MHz
1/ FSCK
–
tWH, tCH
[30]
Clock High Time
45% PSCK
–
–
ns
tWL, tCL
Clock Low Time[30]
45% PSCK
–
–
ns
tCRT, tCLCH Clock Rise Time (slew rate)
0.1
–
–
V/ns
tCFT, tCHCL
Clock Fall Time (slew rate)
0.1
–
–
V/ns
tCS
CS# High Time (Read Instructions)
CS# High Time (Program/Erase)
10
50
–
–
ns
tCSS
CS# Active Setup Time (relative to SCK)
10
–
–
ns
tCSH
CS# Active Hold Time (relative to SCK)
3
–
–
ns
tSU
Data in Setup Time
5
–
3000[31]
ns
tHD
Data in Hold Time
4
–
PSCK
SCK Clock Period
ns
14.5[28]
12.0[29]
Clock Low to Output Valid
–
–
tHO
Output Hold Time
2
–
tDIS
Output Disable Time
0
–
14
ns
tV
ns
ns
tWPS
WP# Setup Time
20[27]
–
–
ns
tWPH
WP# Hold Time
100[27]
–
–
ns
tHLCH
HOLD# Active Setup Time (relative to SCK)
5
–
–
ns
tCHHH
HOLD# Active Hold Time (relative to SCK)
5
–
–
ns
tHHCH
HOLD# Non Active Setup Time (relative to SCK)
5
–
–
ns
tCHHL
HOLD# Non Active Hold Time (relative to SCK)
5
–
–
ns
tHZ
HOLD# enable to Output Invalid
–
–
14
ns
tLZ
HOLD# disable to Output Valid
–
–
14
ns
Notes
27. Only applicable as a constraint for WRR instruction when SRWD is set to a 1.
28. CL = 30 pF.
29. CL = 15 pF.
50 MHz.
30. ±10% duty cycle is supported for frequencies
31. Maximum value only applies during Program/Erase Suspend/Resume commands.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 33 of 136
S25FL512S
5.4.1
Clock Timing
Figure 30. Clock Timing
PSCK
tCH
tCL
VIH min
VIO / 2
VIL max
tCFT
tCRT
5.4.2
Input / Output Timing
Figure 31. SPI Single Bit Input Timing
tCS
CS#
tCSH
tCSH
tCSS
tCSS
SCK
tSU
tHD
SI
MSB IN
LSB IN
SO
Figure 32. SPI Single Bit Output Timing
tCS
CS#
SCK
SI
tLZ
SO
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
tHO
MSB OUT
tV
tDIS
LSB OUT
Page 34 of 136
S25FL512S
Figure 33. SPI SDR MIO Timing
tCS
CS#
tCSS
tCSH
tCSS
SCK
tSU
tLZ
tHD
IO
MSB IN
LSB IN
tHO
tV
MSB OUT
.
tDIS
LSB OUT
Figure 34. Hold Timing
CS#
SCK
tCHHH
tHLCH
tHLCH
tHHCH
tCHHL
tCHHH
tCHHL
HOLD#
Hold Condition
Hold Condition
Standard Use
Non-standard Use
SI_or_IO_(during_input)
tHZ
SO_or_IO_(during_output)
A
tLZ
B
B
tHZ
tLZ
C
D
E
Figure 35. WP# Input Timing
CS#
tWPS
tWPH
WP#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Phase
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
WRR Instruction
Input Data
Page 35 of 136
S25FL512S
5.5 DDR AC Characteristics
Table 13. AC Characteristics DDR Operation
Symbol
66 MHz
Parameter
80 MHz
Min
Typ
Max
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
FSCK, R
SCK Clock Frequency for DDR READ
instruction
DC
–
66
DC
–
80
MHz
PSCK, R
SCK Clock Period for DDR READ
instruction
15
–
12.5
–
ns
tWH, tCH Clock High Time
45% PSCK
–
–
45% PSCK
–
–
ns
tWL, tCL Clock Low Time
45% PSCK
–
–
45% PSCK
–
–
ns
tCS
CS# High Time (Read Instructions)
10
–
–
10
–
–
ns
tCSS
CS# Active Setup Time (relative to SCK)
3
–
–
3
–
–
ns
tCSH
CS# Active Hold Time (relative to SCK)
3
–
–
3
–
–
ns
3000[33]
1.5
–
3000[33]
ns
1.5
–
tSU
I/O in Setup Time
2
–
tHD
I/O in Hold Time
2
–
tV
Clock Low to Output Valid
tHO
Output Hold Time
tDIS
Output Disable Time
tLZ
tIO_SKEW
–
6.5[32]
1.5
–
–
8
Clock to Output Low Impedance
0
–
8
First Output to last Output data valid
time
–
–
600
–
ns
6.5[32]
ns
1.5
–
–
8
ns
0
–
8
ns
–
600
ps
–
ns
Notes
32. Regulated VCC range (3.0 - 3.6V) and CL =15 pF.
33. Maximum value only applies during Program/Erase Suspend/Resume commands.
5.5.1
DDR Input Timing
Figure 36. SPI DDR Input Timing
tCS
CS#
tCSH
tCSS
tCSH
tCSS
SCK
tHD
tSU
tHD
tSU
SI_or_IO
MSB IN
LSB IN
SO
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 36 of 136
S25FL512S
5.5.2
DDR Output Timing
Figure 37. SPI DDR Output Timing
tCS
CS#
SCK
SI
tLZ
SO_or_IO
5.5.3
tHO
tV
tV
tDIS
MSB
LSB
DDR Data Valid Timing Using DLP
Figure 38. SPI DDR Data Valid Window
pSCK
tCL
tCH
SCK
tIO_SKEW
tV
tOTT
IO Slow
Slow D1
S.
Slow D2
tV
IO Fast
Fast D1
Fast D2
tV_min
tHO
tDV
IO_valid
D1
D2
The minimum data valid window (tDV) and tV minimum can be calculated as follows:
tDV = Minimum half clock cycle time (tCLH)[34]- tOTT[36] - tIO_SKEW[35]
tV _min = tHO + tIO_SKEW + tOTT
Example:
80 MHz clock frequency = 12.5 ns clock period, DDR operations and duty cycle of 45% or higher
tCLH = 0.45 x PSCK = 0.45 x 12.5 ns = 5.625 ns
Bus impedance of 45 ohm and capacitance of 22 pf, with timing reference of 0.75VCC, the rise time from 0 to 1 or fall time 1 to 0 is
1.4[39] x RC time constant (Tau)[38] = 1.4 x 0.99 ns = 1.39 ns
tOTT = rise time or fall time = 1.39 ns.
Data Valid Window
tDV = tCLH - tIO_SKEW - tOTT = 5.625 ns - 600 ps - 1.39 ns = 3.635 ns
tV Minimum
tV _min = tHO + tIO_SKEW + tOTT = 1.0 ns + 600 ps + 1.39 ns = 2.99 ns
Notes
34. tCLH is the shorter duration of tCL or tCH.
35. tIO_SKEW is the maximum difference (delta) between the minimum and maximum tV (output valid) across all IO signals.
36. tOTT is the maximum Output Transition Time from one valid data value to the next valid data value on each IO. tOTT is dependent on system level considerations
including:
a. Memory device output impedance (drive strength).
b. System level parasitics on the IOs (primarily bus capacitance).
c. Host memory controller input VIH and VIL levels at which 0 to 1 and 1 to 0 transitions are recognized.
d. tOTT is not a specification tested by Cypress, it is system dependent and must be derived by the system designer based on the above considerations.
37. tDV is the data valid window.
38. Tau = R (Output Impedance) x C (Load capacitance).
39. Multiplier of Tau time for voltage to rise to 75% of VCC.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 37 of 136
S25FL512S
6. Physical Interface
Table 14. Model Specific Connections
VIO / RFU
Versatile I/O or RFU — Some device models bond this connector to the device I/O power supply,
other models bond the device I/O supply to Vcc within the package leaving this package connector
unconnected.
RESET# / RFU
RESET# or RFU — Some device models bond this connector to the device RESET# signal, other
models bond the RESET# signal to Vcc within the package leaving this package connector
unconnected.
Note
40. Refer to Table 2 on page 8 for signal descriptions.
6.1 SOIC 16-Lead Package
6.1.1
SOIC 16 Connection Diagram
Figure 39. 16-Lead SOIC Package, Top View
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
HOLD#/IO3
1
16
SCK
VCC
2
15
SI/IO0
RESET#/RFU
3
14
VIO/RFU
DNU
4
13
NC
DNU
5
12
DNU
RFU
6
11
DNU
CS#
7
10
VSS
SO/IO1
8
9
WP#/IO2
Page 38 of 136
S25FL512S
6.1.2
SOIC 16 Physical Diagram
Figure 40. SOIC 16-Lead, 300-mil Body Width (SO3016)
0.20 C A-B
0.10 C D
2X
0.33 C
0.25 M
C A-B D
0.10 C
0.10 C
DIMENSIONS
SYMBOL
A
NOTES:
NOM.
MAX.
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
2.35
-
2.65
2. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5M - 1994.
3. DIMENSION D DOES NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH, PROTRUSIONS OR GATE BURRS.
MOLD FLASH, PROTRUSIONS OR GATE BURRS SHALL NOT EXCEED 0.15 mm PER
END. DIMENSION E1 DOES NOT INCLUDE INTERLEAD FLASH OR PROTRUSION.
INTERLEAD FLASH OR PROTRUSION SHALL NOT EXCEED 0.25 mm PER SIDE.
D AND E1 DIMENSIONS ARE DETERMINED AT DATUM H.
4. THE PACKAGE TOP MAY BE SMALLER THAN THE PACKAGE BOTTOM. DIMENSIONS
D AND E1 ARE DETERMINED AT THE OUTMOST EXTREMES OF THE PLASTIC BODY
EXCLUSIVE OF MOLD FLASH, TIE BAR BURRS, GATE BURRS AND INTERLEAD
FLASH, BUT INCLUSIVE OF ANY MISMATCH BETWEEN THE TOP AND BOTTOM OF
THE PLASTIC BODY.
5. DATUMS A AND B TO BE DETERMINED AT DATUM H.
6. "N" IS THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF TERMINAL POSITIONS FOR THE SPECIFIED
PACKAGE LENGTH.
7. THE DIMENSIONS APPLY TO THE FLAT SECTION OF THE LEAD BETWEEN 0.10 TO
0.25 mm FROM THE LEAD TIP.
MIN.
A1
0.10
-
0.30
A2
2.05
-
2.55
b
0.31
-
b1
c
0.27
-
0.48
0.20
-
0.33
c1
0.20
-
0.30
D
10.30 BSC
E
10.30 BSC
E1
7.50 BSC
e
1.27 BSC
L
-
0.40
L1
1.40 REF
L2
0.25 BSC
0.51
8. DIMENSION "b" DOES NOT INCLUDE DAMBAR PROTRUSION. ALLOWABLE DAMBAR
PROTRUSION SHALL BE 0.10 mm TOTAL IN EXCESS OF THE "b" DIMENSION AT
1.27
16
N
h
0.25
-
0
0°
-
8°
01
5°
-
15°
02
0°
-
-
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
MAXIMUM MATERIAL CONDITION. THE DAMBAR CANNOT BE LOCATED ON THE
LOWER RADIUS OF THE LEAD FOOT.
9. THIS CHAMFER FEATURE IS OPTIONAL. IF IT IS NOT PRESENT, THEN A PIN 1
IDENTIFIER MUST BE LOCATED WITHIN THE INDEX AREA INDICATED.
10. LEAD COPLANARITY SHALL BE WITHIN 0.10 mm AS MEASURED FROM THE
SEATING PLANE.
0.75
002-15547 *A
Page 39 of 136
S25FL512S
6.2 FAB024 24-Ball BGA Package
6.2.1
Connection Diagram
Figure 41. 24-Ball BGA, 5 x 5 Ball Footprint (FAB024), Top View[41]
1
2
3
4
5
NC
NC
RESET#/
RFU
NC
DNU
SCK
VSS
VCC
NC
DNU
CS#
RFU
WP#/IO2
NC
DNU
SO/IO1
NC
NC
A
B
C
D
SI/IO0 HOLD#/IO3
NC
E
NC
VIO/RFU
NC
Note
41. Signal connections are in the same relative positions as FAC024 BGA, allowing a single PCB footprint to use either package.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 40 of 136
S25FL512S
6.2.2
FAB024 Physical Diagram
Figure 42. Ball Grid Array 24-Ball 6x8 mm (FAB024)
NOTES:
DIMENSIONS
SYMBOL
MIN.
NOM.
MAX.
A
-
-
1.20
A1
0.20
-
-
1.
DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING METHODS PER ASME Y14.5M-1994.
2.
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
3.
BALL POSITION DESIGNATION PER JEP95, SECTION 3, SPP-020.
D
8.00 BSC
E
6.00 BSC
4.
e REPRESENTS THE SOLDER BALL GRID PITCH.
D1
4.00 BSC
5.
SYMBOL "MD" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE "D" DIRECTION.
E1
4.00 BSC
MD
5
ME
5
N
24
b
0.35
0.40
SYMBOL "ME" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE "E" DIRECTION.
N IS THE NUMBER OF POPULATED SOLDER BALL POSITIONS FOR MATRIX SIZE MD X ME.
6
DIMENSION "b" IS MEASURED AT THE MAXIMUM BALL DIAMETER IN A PLANE
PARALLEL TO DATUM C.
0.45
7
"SD" AND "SE" ARE MEASURED WITH RESPECT TO DATUMS A AND B AND DEFINE THE
eE
1.00 BSC
eD
1.00 BSC
POSITION OF THE CENTER SOLDER BALL IN THE OUTER ROW.
SD
0.00 BSC
WHEN THERE IS AN ODD NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE OUTER ROW, "SD" OR "SE" = 0.
SE
0.00 BSC
WHEN THERE IS AN EVEN NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE OUTER ROW, "SD" = eD/2 AND
"SE" = eE/2.
8.
"+" INDICATES THE THEORETICAL CENTER OF DEPOPULATED BALLS.
9.
A1 CORNER TO BE IDENTIFIED BY CHAMFER, LASER OR INK MARK,
METALLIZED MARK INDENTATION OR OTHER MEANS.
002-15534 **
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 41 of 136
S25FL512S
6.3 FAC024 24-Ball BGA Package
6.3.1
Connection Diagram
Figure 43. 24-Ball BGA, 4 x 6 Ball Footprint (FAC024), Top View[42]
1
2
3
4
NC
NC
NC
RESET#/
RFU
DNU
SCK
VSS
VCC
DNU
CS#
RFU
WP#/IO2
DNU
SO/IO1
NC
NC
NC
VIO/RFU
NC
NC
NC
NC
A
B
C
D
SI/IO0 HOLD#/IO3
E
F
Note
42. Signal connections are in the same relative positions as FAC024 BGA, allowing a single PCB footprint to use either package.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 42 of 136
S25FL512S
6.3.2
FAC024 Physical Diagram
Figure 44. Ball Grid Array 24-Ball 6x8 mm (FAC024)
NOTES:
DIMENSIONS
SYMBOL
MIN.
NOM.
MAX.
1.
2.
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
3.
BALL POSITION DESIGNATION PER JEP95, SECTION 3, SPP-020.
4.
e
5.
SYMBOL "MD" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE "D" DIRECTION.
A
-
-
1.20
A1
0.25
-
-
D
8.00 BSC
E
6.00 BSC
D1
5.00 BSC
E1
3.00 BSC
MD
6
ME
4
N
0.35
0.40
REPRESENTS THE SOLDER BALL GRID PITCH.
SYMBOL "ME" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE "E" DIRECTION.
N IS THE NUMBER OF POPULATED SOLDER BALL POSITIONS FOR MATRIX SIZE MD X ME.
6
24
b
DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING METHODS PER ASME Y14.5M-1994.
DIMENSION "b" IS MEASURED AT THE MAXIMUM BALL DIAMETER IN A PLANE
PARALLEL TO DATUM C.
0.45
7
"SD" AND "SE" ARE MEASURED WITH RESPECT TO DATUMS A AND B AND DEFINE THE
eE
1.00 BSC
eD
1.00 BSC
SD
0.50 BSC
WHEN THERE IS AN ODD NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE OUTER ROW, "SD" OR "SE" = 0.
SE
0.50 BSC
WHEN THERE IS AN EVEN NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE OUTER ROW, "SD" = eD/2 AND
POSITION OF THE CENTER SOLDER BALL IN THE OUTER ROW.
"SE" = eE/2.
8.
"+" INDICATES THE THEORETICAL CENTER OF DEPOPULATED BALLS.
9.
A1 CORNER TO BE IDENTIFIED BY CHAMFER, LASER OR INK MARK,
METALLIZED MARK INDENTATION OR OTHER MEANS.
6.3.3
002-15535 **
Special Handling Instructions for FBGA Packages
Flash memory devices in BGA packages may be damaged if exposed to ultrasonic cleaning methods. The package and/or data
integrity may be compromised if the package body is exposed to temperatures above 150°C for prolonged periods of time.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 43 of 136
S25FL512S
Software Interface
This section discusses the features and behaviors most relevant to host system software that interacts with the S25FL512S memory
device.
7. Address Space Maps
7.1 Overview
7.1.1
Extended Address
The S25FL512S device supports 32-bit addresses to enable higher density devices than allowed by previous generation (legacy) SPI
devices that supported only 24-bit addresses. A 24-bit byte resolution address can access only 16 MB (128 Mb) of maximum density.
A 32-bit byte resolution address allows direct addressing of up to a 4 Gbytes (32 Gbits) of address space.
Legacy commands continue to support 24-bit addresses for backward software compatibility. Extended 32-bit addresses are enabled
in three ways:
■
Bank address register — a software (command) loadable internal register that supplies the high order bits of address when legacy
24-bit addresses are in use.
■
Extended address mode — a bank address register bit that changes all legacy commands to expect 32 bits of address supplied
from the host system.
■
New commands — that perform both legacy and new functions, which expect 32-bit address.
The default condition at power-up and after reset, is the Bank address register loaded with zeros and the extended address mode set
for 24-bit addresses. This enables legacy software compatible access to the first 128 Mb of a device.
7.1.2
Multiple Address Spaces
Many commands operate on the main flash memory array. Some commands operate on address spaces separate from the main flash
array. Each separate address space uses the full 32-bit address but may only define a small portion of the available address space.
7.2 Flash Memory Array
The main flash array is divided into erase units called sectors. The sectors are organized as uniform 256-KB sectors.
Table 15. S25FL512S Sector and Memory Address Map, Uniform 256-KB Sectors
Sector Size (KB)
Sector Count
256
256
Sector Range
SA00
:
SA255
Address Range (8-bit)
Notes
00000000h-0003FFFFh Sector Starting Address
:
—
03FC0000h-03FFFFFFh Sector Ending Address
Note This is a condensed table that uses a sector as a reference. There are address ranges that are not explicitly listed. All 256-kB
sectors have the pattern XXXX0000h-XXXXFFFFh.
7.3 ID-CFI Address Space
The RDIDJ command (9Fh) reads information from a separate flash memory address space for device identification (ID) and Common
Flash Interface (CFI) information. See Section 11.3 Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) Address Map on page 111 for
the tables defining the contents of the ID-CFI address space. The ID-CFI address space is programmed by Cypress and read-only
for the host system.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 44 of 136
S25FL512S
7.4 JEDEC JESD216 Serial Flash Discoverable Parameters (SFDP) Space.
The RSFDP command (5Ah) reads information from a separate Flash memory address space for device identification, feature, and
configuration information, in accord with the JEDEC JESD216B standard for Serial Flash Discoverable Parameters. The ID-CFI
address space is incorporated as one of the SFDP parameters.
See Section 11.2 Serial Flash Discoverable Parameters (SFDP) Address Map on page 108 for the table defining the contents of the
SFDP address space. The SFDP address space is programmed by Cypress and is read-only for the host system
7.5 OTP Address Space
Each S25FL512S memory device has a 1024-byte One Time Program (OTP) address space that is separate from the main flash
array. The OTP area is divided into 32, individually lockable, 32-byte aligned and length regions.
In the 32-byte region starting at address zero:
■
The 16 lowest address bytes are programmed by Cypress with a 128-bit random number. Only Cypress is able to program these bytes.
■
The next 4 higher address bytes (OTP Lock Bytes) are used to provide one bit per OTP region to permanently protect each region
from programming. The bytes are erased when shipped from Cypress. After an OTP region is programmed, it can be locked to
prevent further programming, by programming the related protection bit in the OTP Lock Bytes.
■
The next higher 12 bytes of the lowest address region are Reserved for Future Use (RFU). The bits in these RFU bytes may be
programmed by the host system but it must be understood that a future device may use those bits for protection of a larger OTP
space. The bytes are erased when shipped from Cypress.
The remaining regions are erased when shipped from Cypress, and are available for programming of additional permanent data.
Refer to Figure 45 on page 45 for a pictorial representation of the OTP memory space.
The OTP memory space is intended for increased system security. OTP values, such as the random number programmed by Cypress,
can be used to “mate” a flash component with the system CPU/ASIC to prevent device substitution.
The configuration register FREEZE (CR1[0]) bit protects the entire OTP memory space from programming when set to 1. This allows
trusted boot code to control programming of OTP regions then set the FREEZE bit to prevent further OTP memory space programming
during the remainder of normal power-on system operation.
Figure 45. OTP Address Space
32 Byte OTP Region 31
32 Byte OTP Region 30
32 Byte OTP Region 29
.
.
.
When programmed to
“0” each lock bit
protects its related 32
byte region from any
further programming
32 Byte OTP Region 3
32 Byte OTP Region 2
32 Byte OTP Region 1
32 Byte OTP Region 0
...
Lock Bits 31 to 0
Contents of Region 0
{
Reserved
Byte 1F
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Lock Bytes
Byte 10
16 Byte Random Number
Byte 0
Page 45 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 16. OTP Address Map
Region
Byte Address Range (Hex)
Contents
000
Least Significant Byte (LSB) of
Spansion Programmed
Random Number
...
...
00F
Most Significant Byte (MSB) of
Spansion Programmed
Random Number
010 to 013
Region Locking Bits
Byte 10 [bit 0] locks region 0
from programming when = 0
...
Byte 13 [bit 7] locks region 31
from programming when = 0
All bytes = FF
014 to 01F
Reserved for Future Use (RFU)
All bytes = FF
Region 1
020 to 03F
Available for User
Programming
All bytes = FF
Region 2
040 to 05F
Available for User
Programming
All bytes = FF
...
...
Available for User
Programming
All bytes = FF
Region 31
3E0 to 3FF
Available for User
Programming
All bytes = FF
Region 0
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Initial Delivery State (Hex)
Spansion Programmed
Random Number
Page 46 of 136
S25FL512S
7.6 Registers
Registers are small groups of memory cells used to configure how the S25FL512-S memory device operates or to report the status
of device operations. The registers are accessed by specific commands. The commands (and hexadecimal instruction codes) used
for each register are noted in each register description. The individual register bits may be volatile, nonvolatile, or One Time Programmable (OTP). The type for each bit is noted in each register description. The default state shown for each bit refers to the state after
power-on reset, hardware reset, or software reset if the bit is volatile. If the bit is nonvolatile or OTP, the default state is the value of
the bit when the device is shipped from Cypress. Nonvolatile bits have the same cycling (erase and program) endurance as the main
flash array.
Table 17. Register Descriptions
Register
Type
Bit Location
SR1[7:0]
Volatile
7:0
Configuration Register 1
CR1[7:0]
Volatile
7:0
Status Register 2
SR2[7:0]
RFU
7:0
AutoBoot Register
ABRD[31:0]
Nonvolatile
31:0
Bank Address Register
BRAC[7:0]
Volatile
7:0
ECC Status Register
ECCSR[7:0]
Volatile
7:0
ASP Register
ASPR[15:1]
OTP
15:1
ASP Register
ASPR[0]
RFU
0
Password Register
PASS[63:0]
Nonvolatile OTP
63:0
PPB Lock Register
PPBL[7:1]
Volatile
7:1
PPBL[0]
Volatile
Read Only
0
PPB Access Register
PPBAR[7:0]
Nonvolatile
7:0
DYB Access Register
DYBAR[7:0]
Volatile
7:0
SPI DDR Data Learning Registers
NVDLR[7:0]
Nonvolatile
7:0
SPI DDR Data Learning Registers
VDLR[7:0]
Volatile
7:0
Status Register 1
PPB Lock Register
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Abbreviation
Page 47 of 136
S25FL512S
7.6.1
Status Register 1 (SR1)
Related Commands: Read Status Register (RDSR1 05h), Write Registers (WRR 01h), Write Enable (WREN 06h), Write Disable
(WRDI 04h), Clear Status Register (CLSR 30h).
Table 18. Status Register-1 (SR1)
Bits
Field
Name
Function
Type
Default State
7
SRWD
Status Register
Write Disable
Nonvolatile
0
1 = Locks state of SRWD, BP, and configuration
register bits when WP# is low by ignoring WRR
command
0 = No protection, even when WP# is low
6
P_ERR
Programming
Error Occurred
Volatile, Read only
0
1 = Error occurred.
0 = No Error
5
E_ERR
Erase Error
Occurred
Volatile, Read only
0
1 = Error occurred
0 = No Error
4
BP2
Block
Protection
Volatile if CR1[3]=1,
Nonvolatile if
CR1[3]=0
3
BP1
2
BP0
1
0
WEL
Write Enable
Latch
WIP
Write in
Progress
Volatile
Volatile, Read only
Description
1 if CR1[3]=1,
Protects selected range of sectors (Block) from
0 when
shipped from Program or Erase
Cypress
0
1 = Device accepts Write Registers (WRR), program
or erase commands
0 = Device ignores Write Registers (WRR), program
or erase commands
This bit is not affected by WRR, only WREN and
WRDI commands affect this bit
0
1 = Device Busy, a Write Registers (WRR), program,
erase or other operation is in progress
0 = Ready Device is in standby mode and can accept
commands
The Status Register contains both status and control bits:
Status Register Write Disable (SRWD) SR1[7]: Places the device in the Hardware Protected mode when this bit is set to 1 and the
WP# input is driven low. In this mode, the SRWD, BP2, BP1, and BP0 bits of the Status Register become read-only bits and the Write
Registers (WRR) command is no longer accepted for execution. If WP# is high the SRWD bit and BP bits may be changed by the
WRR command. If SRWD is 0, WP# has no effect and the SRWD bit and BP bits may be changed by the WRR command. The SRWD
bit has the same nonvolatile endurance as the main flash array.
Program Error (P_ERR) SR1[6]: The Program Error Bit is used as a program operation success or failure indication. When the
Program Error bit is set to a 1 it indicates that there was an error in the last program operation. This bit will also be set when the user
attempts to program within a protected main memory sector or locked OTP region. When the Program Error bit is set to a 1 this bit
can be reset to 0 with the Clear Status Register (CLSR) command. This is a read-only bit and is not affected by the WRR command.
Erase Error (E_ERR) SR1[5]: The Erase Error Bit is used as an Erase operation success or failure indication. When the Erase Error
bit is set to a 1 it indicates that there was an error in the last erase operation. This bit will also be set when the user attempts to erase
an individual protected main memory sector. The Bulk Erase command will not set E_ERR if a protected sector is found during the
command execution. When the Erase Error bit is set to a 1 this bit can be reset to 0 with the Clear Status Register (CLSR) command.
This is a read-only bit and is not affected by the WRR command.
Block Protection (BP2, BP1, BP0) SR1[4:2]: These bits define the main flash array area to be software-protected against program
and erase commands. The BP bits are either volatile or nonvolatile, depending on the state of the BP nonvolatile bit (BPNV) in the
configuration register. When one or more of the BP bits is set to 1, the relevant memory area is protected against program and erase.
The Bulk Erase (BE) command can be executed only when the BP bits are cleared to 0’s. See Block Protection on page 57 for a
description of how the BP bit values select the memory array area protected. The BP bits have the same nonvolatile endurance as
the main flash array.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 48 of 136
S25FL512S
Write Enable Latch (WEL) SR1[1]: The WEL bit must be set to 1 to enable program, write, or erase operations as a means to provide
protection against inadvertent changes to memory or register values. The Write Enable (WREN) command execution sets the Write
Enable Latch to a 1 to allow any program, erase, or write commands to execute afterwards. The Write Disable (WRDI) command can
be used to set the Write Enable Latch to a 0 to prevent all program, erase, and write commands from execution. The WEL bit is cleared
to 0 at the end of any successful program, write, or erase operation. Following a failed operation the WEL bit may remain set and
should be cleared with a WRDI command following a CLSR command. After a power down/power up sequence, hardware reset, or
software reset, the Write Enable Latch is set to a 0 The WRR command does not affect this bit.
Write In Progress (WIP) SR1[0]: Indicates whether the device is performing a program, write, erase operation, or any other operation,
during which a new operation command will be ignored. When the bit is set to a 1 the device is busy performing an operation. While
WIP is 1, only Read Status (RDSR1 or RDSR2), Erase Suspend (ERSP), Program Suspend (PGSP), Clear Status Register (CLSR),
and Software Reset (RESET) commands may be accepted. ERSP and PGSP will only be accepted if memory array erase or program
operations are in progress. The status register E_ERR and P_ERR bits are updated while WIP = 1. When P_ERR or E_ERR bits are
set to one, the WIP bit will remain set to one indicating the device remains busy and unable to receive new operation commands. A
Clear Status Register (CLSR) command must be received to return the device to standby mode. When the WIP bit is cleared to 0 no
operation is in progress. This is a read-only bit.
7.6.2
Configuration Register 1 (CR1)
Related Commands: Read Configuration Register (RDCR 35h), Write Registers (WRR 01h). The Configuration Register bits can be
changed using the WRR command with sixteen input cycles.
The configuration register controls certain interface and data protection functions.
Table 19. Configuration Register (CR1)
Bits
Field Name
7
LC1
Function
Type
Latency Code
Nonvolatile
Default
State
0
0
Description
Selects number of initial read
latency cycles
See Latency Code Tables
6
LC0
5
TBPROT
Configures Start of Block Protection
OTP
0
1 = BP starts at bottom (Low
address)
0 = BP starts at top (High address)
4
DNU
DNU
DNU
0
Do not Use
3
BPNV
Configures BP2-0 in Status Register
OTP
0
1 = Volatile
0 = Nonvolatile
2
RFU
RFU
RFU
0
Reserved for Future Use
1
QUAD
Puts the device into Quad I/O
operation
Nonvolatile
0
1 = Quad
0 = Dual or Serial
0
FREEZE
Lock current state of BP2-0 bits in
Status Register, TBPROT in
Configuration Register, and OTP
regions
Volatile
0
1 = Block Protection and OTP
locked
0 = Block Protection and OTP
un-locked
Latency Code (LC) CR1[7:6]: The Latency Code selects the number of mode and dummy cycles between the end of address and
the start of read data output for all read commands.
Some read commands send mode bits following the address to indicate that the next command will be of the same type with an
implied, rather than an explicit, instruction. The next command thus does not provide an instruction byte, only a new address and
mode bits. This reduces the time needed to send each command when the same command type is repeated in a sequence of
commands.
Dummy cycles provide additional latency that is needed to complete the initial read access of the flash array before data can be
returned to the host system. Some read commands require additional latency cycles as the SCK frequency is increased.
The following latency code tables provide different latency settings that are configured by Cypress. The High Performance versus the
Enhanced High Performance settings are selected by the ordering part number.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 49 of 136
S25FL512S
Where mode or latency (dummy) cycles are shown in the tables as a dash, that read command is not supported at the frequency
shown. Read is supported only up to 50 MHz but the same latency value is assigned in each latency code and the command may be
used when the device is operated at 50 MHz with any latency code setting. Similarly, only the Fast Read command is supported
up to 133 MHz but the same 10b latency code is used for Fast Read up to 133 MHz and for the other dual and quad read commands
up to 104 MHz. It is not necessary to change the latency code from a higher to a lower frequency when operating at lower frequencies
where a particular command is supported. The latency code values for a higher frequency can be used for accesses at lower
frequencies.
The High Performance settings provide latency options that are the same or faster than alternate source SPI memories. These settings
provide mode bits only for the Quad I/O Read command.
The Enhanced High Performance settings similarly provide latency options the same or faster than additional alternate source SPI
memories and adds mode bits for the Dual I/O Read, DDR Fast Read, and DDR
Dual I/O Read commands.
Read DDR Data Learning Pattern (DLP) bits may be placed within the dummy cycles immediately before the start of read data, if there
are 5 or more dummy cycles. See Section 9.4 Read Memory Array Commands on page 78 for more information on the DLP.
Table 20. Latency Codes for SDR High Performance
Read
Freq.
(MHz)
LC
≤ 50
≤ 80
Fast Read
(03h, 13h)
Read Dual Out
(0Bh, 0Ch)
(3Bh, 3Ch)
Read Quad Out
(6Bh, 6Ch)
Dual I/O Read
Quad I/O Read
(BBh, BCh)
(EBh, ECh)
Mode
Dummy
Mode
Dummy
Mode
Dummy
Mode
Dummy
Mode
Dummy Mode Dummy
11
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
2
1
00
–
–
0
8
0
8
0
8
0
4
2
4
≤ 90
01
–
–
0
8
0
8
0
8
0
5
2
4
≤104
10
–
–
0
8
0
8
0
8
0
6
2
5
≤133
10
–
–
0
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Table 21. Latency Codes for DDR High Performance
DDR Fast Read
DDR Dual I/O Read
Read DDR Quad I/O
(0Dh, 0Eh)
(BDh, BEh)
(EDh, EEh)
Freq.
(MHz)
LC
Mode
Dummy
Mode
Dummy
Mode
Dummy
≤ 50
11
0
4
0
4
1
3
≤ 66
00
0
5
0
6
1
6
≤ 66
01
0
6
0
7
1
7
≤ 66
10
0
7
0
8
1
8
Table 22. Latency Codes for SDR Enhanced High Performance
Freq.
(MHz)
LC
≤ 50
Read
Fast Read
Read Dual Out
Read Quad Out
Dual I/O Read
Quad I/O Read
(03h, 13h)
(0Bh, 0Ch)
(3Bh, 3Ch)
(6Bh, 6Ch)
(BBh, BCh)
(EBh, ECh)
Mode
Dummy
Mode
Dummy
Mode
Dummy
Mode
Dummy
Mode
11
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
2
1
≤ 80
00
–
–
0
8
0
8
0
8
4
0
2
4
≤ 90
01
–
–
0
8
0
8
0
8
4
1
2
4
≤104
10
–
–
0
8
0
8
0
8
4
2
2
5
≤133
10
–
–
0
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Dummy Mode
Dummy
Page 50 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 23. Latency Codes for DDR Enhanced High Performance
Freq.
(MHz)
LC
≤ 50
DDR Fast Read
DDR Dual I/O Read
Read DDR Quad I/O
(0Dh, 0Eh)
(BDh, BEh)
(EDh, EEh)
Mode
Dummy
Mode
Dummy
Mode
Dummy
11
4
1
2
2
1
3
≤ 66
00
4
2
2
4
1
6
≤ 66
01
4
4
2
5
1
7
≤ 66
10
4
5
2
6
1
8
≤ 80
00
4
2
2
4
1
6
≤ 80
01
4
4
2
5
1
7
≤ 80
10
4
5
2
6
1
8
Note
43. When using DDR I/O commands with the Data Learning Pattern (DLP) enabled, a Latency Code that provides 5 or more dummy cycles should be selected to allow
1 cycle of additional time for the host to stop driving before the memory starts driving the 4 cycle DLP. It is recommended to use LC 10 for DDR Fast Read, LC 01 for
DDR Dual I/O Read, and LC 00 for DDR Quad I/O Read, if the Data Learning Pattern (DLP) for DDR is used.
Top or Bottom Protection (TBPROT) CR1[5]: This bit defines the operation of the Block Protection bits BP2, BP1, and BP0 in the
Status Register. As described in the status register section, the BP2-0 bits allow the user to optionally protect a portion of the array,
ranging from 1/64, 1/4, 1/2, etc., up to the entire array. When TBPROT is set to a 0 the Block Protection is defined to start from the
top (maximum address) of the array. When TBPROT is set to a 1 the Block Protection is defined to start from the bottom (zero address)
of the array. The TBPROT bit is OTP and set to a 0 when shipped from Cypress. If TBPROT is programmed to 1, an attempt to change
it back to 0 will fail and set the Program Error bit (P_ERR in SR1[6]).
The desired state of TBPROT must be selected during the initial configuration of the device during system manufacture; before the
first program or erase operation on the main flash array. TBPROT must not be programmed after programming or erasing is done in
the main flash array.
CR1[4]: Reserved for Future Use
Block Protection Nonvolatile (BPNV) CR1[3]: The BPNV bit defines whether or not the BP2-0 bits in the Status Register are volatile
or nonvolatile. The BPNV bit is OTP and cleared to a0 with the BP bits cleared to 000 when shipped from Cypress. When BPNV is
set to a 0 the BP2-0 bits in the Status Register are nonvolatile. When BPNV is set to a 1 the BP2-0 bits in the Status Register are
volatile and will be reset to binary 111 after POR, hardware reset, or command reset. If BPNV is programmed to 1, an attempt to
change it back to 0 will fail and set the Program Error bit (P_ERR in SR1[6]).
CR1[2]: Reserved for Future Use.
Quad Data Width (QUAD) CR1[1]: When set to 1, this bit switches the data width of the device to 4 bit - Quad mode. That is, WP#
becomes I/O2 and HOLD# becomes I/O3. The WP# and HOLD# inputs are not monitored for their normal functions and are internally
set to high (inactive). The commands for Serial, Dual Output, and Dual I/O Read still function normally but, there is no need to drive
WP# and Hold# inputs for those commands when switching between commands using different data path widths. The QUAD bit must
be set to one when using Read Quad Out, Quad I/O Read, Read DDR Quad I/O, and Quad Page Program commands. The QUAD
bit is nonvolatile.
Freeze Protection (FREEZE) CR1[0]: The Freeze Bit, when set to 1, locks the current state of the BP2-0 bits in Status Register, the
TBPROT and TBPARM bits in the Configuration Register, and the OTP address space. This prevents writing, programming, or erasing
these areas. As long as the FREEZE bit remains cleared to logic 0 the other bits of the Configuration Register, including FREEZE,
are writable, and the OTP address space is programmable. Once the FREEZE bit has been written to a logic 1 it can only be cleared
to a logic 0 by a power-off to power-on cycle or a hardware reset. Software reset will not affect the state of the FREEZE bit. The
FREEZE bit is volatile and the default state of FREEZE after power-on is 0. The FREEZE bit can be set in parallel with updating other
values in CR1 by a single WRR command.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 51 of 136
S25FL512S
7.6.3
Status Register 2 (SR2)
Related Commands: Read Status Register 2 (RDSR2 07h).
Table 24. Status Register-2 (SR2)
Bits
Field Name
Function
Type
Default State
Description
7
RFU
Reserved
–
0
Reserved for Future Use
6
RFU
Reserved
–
0
Reserved for Future Use
5
RFU
Reserved
–
0
Reserved for Future Use
4
RFU
Reserved
–
0
Reserved for Future Use
3
RFU
Reserved
–
0
Reserved for Future Use
2
RFU
Reserved
–
0
Reserved for Future Use
1
ES
Erase Suspend
Volatile, Read only
0
1 = In erase suspend mode
0 = Not in erase suspend mode
0
PS
Program
Suspend
Volatile, Read only
0
1 = In program suspend mode
0 = Not in program suspend mode
Erase Suspend (ES) SR2[1]: The Erase Suspend bit is used to determine when the device is in Erase Suspend mode. This is a
status bit that cannot be written. When Erase Suspend bit is set to 1, the device is in erase suspend mode. When Erase Suspend bit
is cleared to 0, the device is not in erase suspend mode. Refer to Erase Suspend and Resume Commands (75h) (7Ah) for details
about the Erase Suspend/Resume commands.
Program Suspend (PS) SR2[0]: The Program Suspend bit is used to determine when the device is in Program Suspend mode. This
is a status bit that cannot be written. When Program Suspend bit is set to 1, the device is in program suspend mode. When the Program
Suspend bit is cleared to 0, the device is not in program suspend mode. Refer to Section 9.5.4 Program Suspend (PGSP 85h) and
Resume (PGRS 8Ah) on page 94 for details.
7.6.4
AutoBoot Register
Related Commands: AutoBoot Read (ABRD 14h) and AutoBoot Write (ABWR 15h).
The AutoBoot Register provides a means to automatically read boot code as part of the power on reset, hardware reset, or software
reset process.
Table 25. AutoBoot Register
Bits
Field Name
Function
Type
Default State
Description
31 to 9
ABSA
AutoBoot Start
Address
Nonvolatile
000000h
512 byte boundary address for the start of
boot code access
8 to 1
ABSD
AutoBoot Start
Delay
Nonvolatile
00h
Number of initial delay cycles between
CS# going low and the first bit of boot code
being transferred
0
ABE
AutoBoot Enable
Nonvolatile
0
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
1 = AutoBoot is enabled
0 = AutoBoot is not enabled
Page 52 of 136
S25FL512S
7.6.5
Bank Address Register
Related Commands: Bank Register Access (BRAC B9h), Write Register (WRR 01h), Bank Register Read (BRRD 16h) and Bank
Register Write (BRWR 17h).
The Bank Address register supplies additional high order bits of the main flash array byte boundary address for legacy commands
that supply only the low order 24 bits of address. The Bank Address is used as the high bits of address (above A23) for all 3-byte
address commands when EXTADD=0. The Bank Address is not used when EXTADD = 1 and traditional 3-byte address commands
are instead required to provide all four bytes of address.
Table 26. Bank Address Register (BAR)
Bits
Field Name
Function
Type
Default State
Description
7
EXTADD
Extended Address
Enable
Volatile
0b
6 to 2
RFU
Reserved
Volatile
00000b
1
BA25
Bank Address
Volatile
0
A25 for 512 Mb device
0
BA24
Bank Address
Volatile
0
A24 for 512 Mb device
1 = 4-byte (32-bits) addressing required from command.
0 = 3-byte (24-bits) addressing from command + Bank
Address
Reserved for Future Use
Extended Address (EXTADD) BAR[7]: EXTADD controls the address field size for legacy SPI commands. By default (power up reset,
hardware reset, and software reset), it is cleared to 0 for 3 bytes (24 bits) of address. When set to 1, the legacy commands will require
4 bytes (32 bits) for the address field. This is a volatile bit.
7.6.6
ECC Status Register (ECCSR)
Related Commands: ECC Read (ECCRD 18h). ECCSR does not have user programmable nonvolatile bits. All defined bits are volatile
read only status. The default state of these bits are set by hardware. See Section 9.5.1.1 Automatic ECC on page 92.
The status of ECC in each ECC unit is provided by the 8-bit ECC Status Register (ECCSR). The ECC Register Read command is
written followed by an ECC unit address. The contents of the status register then indicates, for the selected ECC unit, whether there
is an error in the ECC unit eight bit error correction code, the ECC unit of 16 Bytes of data, or that ECC is disabled for that ECC unit.
Table 27. ECC Status Register (ECCSR)
Bits
Field Name
Function
7 to 3
RFU
Reserved
Type
Default
State
Description
0
Reserved for Future Use
2
EECC
Error in ECC
Volatile, Read only
0
1 = Single Bit Error found in the ECC unit eight
bit error correction code
0 = No error.
1
EECCD
Error in ECC unit
data
Volatile, Read only
0
1 = Single Bit Error corrected in ECC unit
data.
0 = No error.
0
ECCDI
ECC Disabled
Volatile, Read only
0
1 = ECC is disabled in the selected ECC unit.
0 = ECC is enabled in the selected ECC unit.
ECCSR[2] = 1 indicates an error was corrected in the ECC. ECCSR[1] = 1 indicates an error was corrected in the ECC unit data.
ECCSR[0] = 1 indicates the ECC is disabled. The default state of “0” for all these bits indicates no failures and ECC is enabled.
ECCSR[7:3] are reserved. These have undefined high or low values that can change from one ECC status read to another. These
bits should be treated as “don’t care” and ignored by any software reading status.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 53 of 136
S25FL512S
7.6.7
ASP Register (ASPR)
Related Commands: ASP Read (ASPRD 2Bh) and ASP Program (ASPP 2Fh).
The ASP register is a 16-bit OTP memory location used to permanently configure the behavior of Advanced Sector Protection (ASP)
features.
Table 28. ASP Register (ASPR)
Bits
Field Name
Function
Type
Default
State
15 to 9
RFU
Reserved
OTP
1
8
RFU
Reserved
OTP
7
RFU
Reserved
OTP
6
RFU
Reserved
OTP
5
RFU
Reserved
OTP
Reserved for Future Use
4
RFU
Reserved
OTP
Note [44] Reserved for Future Use
3
RFU
Reserved
OTP
Reserved for Future Use
2
PWDMLB
Password
Protection Mode
Lock Bit
OTP
1
0 = Password Protection Mode permanently enabled.
1 = Password Protection Mode not permanently enabled.
1
PSTMLB
Persistent
Protection Mode
Lock Bit
OTP
1
0 = Persistent Protection Mode permanently enabled.
1 = Persistent Protection Mode not permanently enabled.
0
RFU
Reserved
OTP
1
Reserved for Future Use
Description
Reserved for Future Use
Note [44]
1
Reserved for Future Use
Reserved for Future Use
Reserved for Future Use
Note
44. Default value depends on ordering part number, see Section 11.6 Initial Delivery State on page 130.
Reserved for Future Use (RFU) ASPR[15:3, 0].
Password Protection Mode Lock Bit (PWDMLB) ASPR[2]: When programmed to 0, the Password Protection Mode is permanently
selected.
Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit (PSTMLB) ASPR[1]: When programmed to 0, the Persistent Protection Mode is permanently
selected. PWDMLB and PSTMLB are mutually exclusive, only one may be programmed to zero.
7.6.8
Password Register (PASS)
Related Commands: Password Read (PASSRD E7h) and Password Program (PASSP E8h).
Table 29. Password Register (PASS)
Bits
Field
Name
Function
Type
63 to 0
PWD
Hidden
Password
OTP
7.6.9
Default State
Description
Nonvolatile OTP storage of 64-bit password. The password
FFFFFFFF-FFFFFF
is no longer readable after the password protection mode is
FFh
selected by programming ASP register bit 2 to zero.
PPB Lock Register (PPBL)
Related Commands: PPB Lock Read (PLBRD A7h, PLBWR A6h)
Table 30. PPB Lock Register (PPBL)
Bits
Field Name
Function
Type
Default State
7 to 1
RFU
Reserved
Volatile
00h
0
PPBLOCK Protect PPB Array
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Volatile
Description
Reserved for Future Use
0 = PPB array protected until next power
Persistent Protection Mode = 1 cycle or hardware reset
Password Protection Mode = 0 1 = PPB array may be programmed or
erased.
Page 54 of 136
S25FL512S
7.6.10 PPB Access Register (PPBAR)
Related Commands: PPB Read (PPBRD E2h)
Table 31. PPB Access Register (PPBAR)
Bits
7 to 0
7.6.11
Field Name
PPB
Function
Type
Read or Program
per sector PPB
Nonvolatile
Default
State
Description
FFh
00h = PPB for the sector addressed by the PPBRD or
PPBP command is programmed to 0, protecting that
sector from program or erase operations.
FFh = PPB for the sector addressed by the PPBRD or
PPBP command is erased to 1, not protecting that
sector from program or erase operations.
DYB Access Register (DYBAR)
Related Commands: DYB Read (DYBRD E0h) and DYB Program (DYBP E1h).
Table 32. DYB Access Register (DYBAR)
Bits
7 to 0
Field Name
DYB
Function
Read or Write
per sector DYB
Type
Default State
Description
FFh
00h = DYB for the sector addressed by the DYBRD or DYBP
command is cleared to 0, protecting that sector from program or
erase operations.
FFh = DYB for the sector addressed by the DYBRD or DYBP
command is set to 1, not protecting that sector from program or
erase operations.
Volatile
7.6.12 SPI DDR Data Learning Registers
Related Commands: Program NVDLR (PNVDLR 43h), Write VDLR (WVDLR 4Ah), Data Learning Pattern Read (DLPRD 41h).
The Data Learning Pattern (DLP) resides in an 8-bit Nonvolatile Data Learning Register (NVDLR) as well as an 8-bit Volatile Data
Learning Register (VDLR). When shipped from Cypress, the NVDLR value is 00h. Once programmed, the NVDLR cannot be reprogrammed or erased; a copy of the data pattern in the NVDLR will also be written to the VDLR. The VDLR can be written to at any
time, but on reset or power cycles the data pattern will revert back to what is in the NVDLR. During the learning phase described in
the SPI DDR modes, the DLP will come from the VDLR. Each I/O will output the same DLP value for every clock edge. For example,
if the DLP is 34h (or binary 00110100) then during the first clock edge all I/O’s will output 0; subsequently, the 2nd clock edge all I/O’s
will output 0, the 3rd will output 1, etc.
When the VDLR value is 00h, no preamble data pattern is presented during the dummy phase in the DDR commands.
Table 33. Nonvolatile Data Learning Register (NVDLR)
Bits
7 to 0
Field Name
Function
NVDLP
Nonvolatile
Data Learning
Pattern
Type
OTP
Default State
Description
00h
OTP value that may be transferred to the host during
DDR read command latency (dummy) cycles to
provide a training pattern to help the host more
accurately center the data capture point in the
received data bits.
Default State
Description
Table 34. Volatile Data Learning Register (NVDLR)
Bits
7 to 0
Field Name
Function
VDLP
Volatile Data
Learning
Pattern
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Type
Volatile
Volatile copy of the NVDLP used to enable and deliver
Takes the value of
the Data Learning Pattern (DLP) to the outputs. The
NVDLR during POR or
VDLP may be changed by the host during system
Reset
operation.
Page 55 of 136
S25FL512S
8.
Data Protection
8.1 Secure Silicon Region (OTP)
The device has a 1024-byte One Time Program (OTP) address space that is separate from the main flash array. The OTP area is
divided into 32, individually lockable, 32-byte aligned and length regions.
The OTP memory space is intended for increased system security. OTP values can “mate” a flash component with the system
CPU/ASIC to prevent device substitution. See Section 7.5 OTP Address Space on page 45, Section 9.7 One Time Program Array
Commands on page 98, and Section 9.7.2 OTP Read (OTPR 4Bh) on page 98.
8.1.1
Reading OTP Memory Space
The OTP Read command uses the same protocol as Fast Read. OTP Read operations outside the valid 1-kB OTP address range
will yield indeterminate data.
8.1.2
Programming OTP Memory Space
The protocol of the OTP programming command is the same as Page Program. The OTP Program command can be issued multiple
times to any given OTP address, but this address space can never be erased.
Automatic ECC is programmed on the first programming operation to each 16-byte region. Programming within a 16-byte region more
than once disables the ECC. It is recommended to program each 16-byte portion of each 32-byte region once so that ECC remains
enabled to provide the best data integrity.
The valid address range for OTP Program is depicted in Figure 45 on page 45. OTP Program operations outside the valid OTP
address range will be ignored and the WEL in SR1 will remain high (set to 1). OTP Program operations while FREEZE = 1 will fail
with P_ERR in SR1 set to 1.
8.1.3
Cypress Programmed Random Number
Cypress standard practice is to program the low order 16 bytes of the OTP memory space (locations 0x0 to 0xF) with a 128-bit random
number using the Linear Congruential Random Number Method. The seed value for the algorithm is a random number concatenated
with the day and time of tester insertion.
8.1.4
Lock Bytes
The LSb of each Lock byte protects the lowest address region related to the byte, the MSb protects the highest address region related
to the byte. The next higher address byte similarly protects the next higher 8 regions. The LSb bit of the lowest address Lock Byte
protects the higher address 16 bytes of the lowest address region. In other words, the LSb of location 0x10 protects all the Lock Bytes
and RFU bytes in the lowest address region from further programming. See Section 7.5 OTP Address Space on page 45.
8.2 Write Enable Command
The Write Enable (WREN) command must be written prior to any command that modifies nonvolatile data. The WREN command sets
the Write Enable Latch (WEL) bit. The WEL bit is cleared to 0 (disables writes) during power-up, hardware reset, or after the device
completes the following commands:
■
Reset
■
Page Program (PP)
■
Sector Erase (SE)
■
Bulk Erase (BE)
■
Write Disable (WRDI)
■
Write Registers (WRR)
■
Quad-input Page Programming (QPP)
■
OTP Byte Programming (OTPP)
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 56 of 136
S25FL512S
8.3 Block Protection
The Block Protect bits (Status Register bits BP2, BP1, BP0) in combination with the Configuration Register TBPROT bit can be used
to protect an address range of the main flash array from program and erase operations. The size of the range is determined by the
value of the BP bits and the upper or lower starting point of the range is selected by the TBPROT bit of the configuration register.
Table 35. Upper Array Start of Protection (TBPROT = 0)
Status Register Content
Protected Fraction of Memory Array
Protected Memory (KB)
FL512S
512 Mb
BP2
BP1
BP0
0
0
0
None
0
0
0
1
Upper 64th
1024
0
1
0
Upper 32nd
2048
0
1
1
Upper 16th
4096
1
0
0
Upper 8th
8192
1
0
1
Upper 4th
16384
1
1
0
Upper Half
32768
1
1
1
All Sectors
65536
Protected Fraction of Memory Array
Protected Memory (KB)
FL512S
512 Mb
Table 36. Lower Array Start of Protection (TBPROT = 1)
Status Register Content
BP2
BP1
BP0
0
0
0
None
0
0
0
1
Lower 64th
1024
0
1
0
Lower 32nd
2048
0
1
1
Lower 16th
4096
1
0
0
Lower 8th
8192
1
0
1
Lower 4th
16384
1
1
0
Lower Half
32768
1
1
1
All Sectors
65536
When Block Protection is enabled (i.e., any BP2-0 are set to 1), Advanced Sector Protection (ASP) can still be used to protect sectors
not protected by the Block Protection scheme. In the case that both ASP and Block Protection are used on the same sector the logical
OR of ASP and Block Protection related to the sector is used. Recommendation: ASP and Block Protection should not be used
concurrently. Use one or the other, but not both.
8.3.1
Freeze Bit
Bit 0 of the Configuration Register is the FREEZE bit. The FREEZE bit locks the BP2-0 bits in Status Register 1 and the TBPROT bit
in the Configuration Register to their value at the time the FREEZE bit is set to 1. Once the FREEZE bit has been written to a logic 1
it cannot be cleared to a logic 0 until a power-on-reset is executed. As long as the FREEZE bit is cleared to logic 0 the status register
BP bits and the TBPROT bit of the Configuration Register are writable. The FREEZE bit also protects the entire OTP memory space
from programming when set to 1. Any attempt to change the BP bits with the WRR command while FREEZE = 1 is ignored and no
error status is set.
8.3.2
Write Protect Signal
The Write Protect (WP#) input in combination with the Status Register Write Disable (SRWD) bit provide hardware input signal
controlled protection. When WP# is Low and SRWD is set to 1 the Status and Configuration register is protected from alteration. This
prevents disabling or changing the protection defined by the Block Protect bits.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 57 of 136
S25FL512S
8.4 Advanced Sector Protection
Advanced Sector Protection (ASP) is the name used for a set of independent hardware and software methods used to disable or
enable programming or erase operations, individually, in any or all sectors. An overview of these methods is shown in Figure 46
on page 58.
Block Protection and ASP protection settings for each sector are logically OR’d to define the protection for each sector, i.e. if either
mechanism is protecting a sector the sector cannot be programmed or erased. Refer to Section 8.3 Block Protection on page 57 for
full details of the BP2-0 bits.
Figure 46. Advanced Sector Protection Overview
ASP Register
One Time Programmable
Password Method Persistent Method
(ASPR[2]=0)
6.) Password Method requires a
password to set PPB Lock to “1”
to enable program or erase of
PPB bits
(ASPR[1]=0)
7.) Persistent Method only allows
PPB Lock to be cleared to “0” to
prevent program or erase of PPB
bits. Power off or hardware reset
required to set PPB Lock to “1”
64 -bit Password
(One Time Protect)
4.) PPB Lock bit is volatile and
defaults to “1” (persistent
mode).or “0” (password mode)
upon reset
PBB Lock Bit
“0” = PPBs locked
Memory Array
“1”=PPBs unlocked
Persistent
Protection Bits
Bit
(PPB)
Dynamic
Protection Bits
Bit
(DYB)
Sector 0
PPB 0
Sector 1
PPB 1
DYB 1
Sector 2
PPB 2
DYB 2
DYB 0
Sector N -2
PPB N -2
DYB N -2
Sector N -1
PPB N -1
DYB N -1
Sector N
PPB N
DYB N
1.) N = Highest Address Sector,
Sector
a sector is protected if its PPB =”0”
or its DYB = “0”
2.) PPB are programmed individually
but erased as a group
5.) PPB Lock = “0” locks all PPBs
to their current state
3.) DYB are volatile bits
Every main flash array sector has a nonvolatile (PPB) and a volatile (DYB) protection bit associated with it. When either bit is 0, the
sector is protected from program and erase operations.
The PPB bits are protected from program and erase when the PPB Lock bit is 0. There are two methods for managing the state of
the PPB Lock bit, Persistent Protection and Password Protection.
The Persistent Protection method sets the PPB Lock bit to 1 during POR, or Hardware Reset so that the PPB bits are unprotected by
a device reset. There is a command to clear the PPB Lock bit to 0 to protect the PPB. There is no command in the Persistent Protection
method to set the PPB Lock bit to 1, therefore the PPB Lock bit will remain at 0 until the next power-off or hardware reset. The
Persistent Protection method allows boot code the option of changing sector protection by programming or erasing the PPB, then
protecting the PPB from further change for the remainder of normal system operation by clearing the PPB Lock bit to 0. This is
sometimes called Boot-code controlled sector protection.
The Password method clears the PPB Lock bit to 0 during POR, or Hardware Reset to protect the PPB. A 64-bit password may be
permanently programmed and hidden for the password method. A command can be used to provide a password for comparison with
the hidden password. If the password matches, the PPB Lock bit is set to 1 to unprotect the PPB. A command can be used to clear
the PPB Lock bit to 0. This method requires use of a password to control PPB protection.
The selection of the PPB Lock bit management method is made by programming OTP bits in the ASP Register so as to permanently
select the method used.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 58 of 136
S25FL512S
8.4.1
ASP Register
The ASP register is used to permanently configure the behavior of Advanced Sector Protection (ASP) features. See Table 28
on page 54.
As shipped from the factory, all devices default ASP to the Persistent Protection mode, with all sectors unprotected, when power is
applied. The device programmer or host system must then choose which sector protection method to use. Programming either of the,
one-time programmable, Protection Mode Lock Bits, locks the part permanently in the selected mode:
■
ASPR[2:1] = 11 = No ASP mode selected, Persistent Protection Mode is the default.
■
ASPR[2:1] = 10 = Persistent Protection Mode permanently selected.
■
ASPR[2:1] = 01 = Password Protection Mode permanently selected.
■
ASPR[2:1] = 00 = Illegal condition, attempting to program both bits to zero results in a programming failure.
ASP register programming rules:
■
If the password mode is chosen, the password must be programmed prior to setting the Protection Mode Lock Bits.
■
Once the Protection Mode is selected, the Protection Mode Lock Bits are permanently protected from programming and no further
changes to the ASP register is allowed.
The programming time of the ASP Register is the same as the typical page programming time. The system can determine the status
of the ASP register programming operation by reading the WIP bit in the Status Register. See Status Register 1 (SR1) on page 48 for
information on WIP.
After selecting a sector protection method, each sector can operate in each of the following states:
■
Dynamically Locked — A sector is protected and can be changed by a simple command.
■
Persistently Locked — A sector is protected and cannot be changed if its PPB Bit is 0.
■
Unlocked — The sector is unprotected and can be changed by a simple command.
8.4.2
Persistent Protection Bits
The Persistent Protection Bits (PPB) are located in a separate nonvolatile flash array. One of the PPB bits is related to each sector.
When a PPB is 0, its related sector is protected from program and erase operations. The PPB are programmed individually but must
be erased as a group, similar to the way individual words may be programmed in the main array but an entire sector must be erased
at the same time. The PPB have the same program and erase endurance as the main flash memory array. Preprogramming and
verification prior to erasure are handled by the device.
Programming a PPB bit requires the typical page programming time. Erasing all the PPBs requires typical sector erase time. During
PPB bit programming and PPB bit erasing, status is available by reading the Status register. Reading of a PPB bit requires the initial
access time of the device.
Notes
Each PPB is individually programmed to 0 and all are erased to 1 in parallel.
If the PPB Lock bit is 0, the PPB Program or PPB Erase command does not execute and fails without programming or erasing the PPB.
The state of the PPB for a given sector can be verified by using the PPB Read command.
8.4.3
Dynamic Protection Bits
Dynamic Protection Bits are volatile and unique for each sector and can be individually modified. DYB only control the protection for
sectors that have their PPB set to 1. By issuing the DYB Write command, a DYB is cleared to 0 or set to 1, thus placing each sector
in the protected or unprotected state respectively. This feature allows software to easily protect sectors against inadvertent changes,
yet does not prevent the easy removal of protection when changes are needed. The DYBs can be set or cleared as often as needed
as they are volatile bits.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 59 of 136
S25FL512S
8.4.4
PPB Lock Bit (PPBL[0])
The PPB Lock Bit is a volatile bit for protecting all PPB bits. When cleared to 0, it locks all PPBs and when set to 1, it allows the PPBs
to be changed.
The PLBWR command is used to clear the PPB Lock bit to 0. The PPB Lock Bit must be cleared to 0 only after all the PPBs are
configured to the desired settings.
In Persistent Protection mode, the PPB Lock is set to 1 during POR or a hardware reset. When cleared to 0, no software command
sequence can set the PPB Lock bit to 1, only another hardware reset or power-up can set the PPB Lock bit.
In the Password Protection mode, the PPB Lock bit is cleared to 0 during POR or a hardware reset. The PPB Lock bit can only be
set to 1 by the Password Unlock command.
8.4.5
Sector Protection States Summary
Each sector can be in one of the following protection states:
■
Unlocked — The sector is unprotected and protection can be changed by a simple command. The protection state defaults to
unprotected after a power cycle, software reset, or hardware reset.
■
Dynamically Locked — A sector is protected and protection can be changed by a simple command. The protection state is not saved
across a power cycle or reset.
■
Persistently Locked — A sector is protected and protection can only be changed if the PPB Lock Bit is set to 1. The protection state
is nonvolatile and saved across a power cycle or reset. Changing the protection state requires programming and or erase of the
PPB bits
Table 37. Sector Protection States
Protection Bit Values
Sector State
PPB Lock
PPB
DYB
1
1
1
Unprotected – PPB and DYB are changeable
1
1
0
Protected – PPB and DYB are changeable
1
0
1
Protected – PPB and DYB are changeable
1
0
0
Protected – PPB and DYB are changeable
8.4.6
0
1
1
Unprotected – PPB not changeable, DYB is changeable
0
1
0
Protected – PPB not changeable, DYB is changeable
0
0
1
Protected – PPB not changeable, DYB is changeable
0
0
0
Protected – PPB not changeable, DYB is changeable
Persistent Protection Mode
The Persistent Protection method sets the PPB Lock bit to 1 during POR or Hardware Reset so that the PPB bits are unprotected by
a device hardware reset. Software reset does not affect the PPB Lock bit. The PLBWR command can clear the PPB Lock bit to 0 to
protect the PPB. There is no command to set the PPB Lock bit therefore the PPB Lock bit will remain at 0 until the next power-off or
hardware reset.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 60 of 136
S25FL512S
8.4.7
Password Protection Mode
Password Protection Mode allows an even higher level of security than the Persistent Sector Protection Mode, by requiring a 64-bit
password for unlocking the PPB Lock bit. In addition to this password requirement, after power up and hardware reset, the PPB Lock
bit is cleared to 0 to ensure protection at power-up. Successful execution of the Password Unlock command by entering the entire
password clears the PPB Lock bit, allowing for sector PPB modifications.
Password Protection Notes
■
Once the Password is programmed and verified, the Password Mode (ASPR[2]=0) must be set in order to prevent reading the
password.
■
The Password Program Command is only capable of programming ‘0’s. Programming a 1 after a cell is programmed as a 0 results
in the cell left as a 0 with no programming error set.
■
The password is all 1’s when shipped from Cypress. It is located in its own memory space and is accessible through the use of the
Password Program and Password Read commands.
■
All 64-bit password combinations are valid as a password.
■
The Password Mode, once programmed, prevents reading the 64-bit password and further password programming. All further
program and read commands to the password region are disabled and these commands are ignored. There is no means to verify
what the password is after the Password Mode Lock Bit is selected. Password verification is only allowed before selecting the
Password Protection mode.
■
The Protection Mode Lock Bits are not erasable.
■
The exact password must be entered in order for the unlocking function to occur. If the password unlock command provided password
does not match the hidden internal password, the unlock operation fails in the same manner as a programming operation on a
protected sector. The P_ERR bit is set to one and the WIP Bit remains set. In this case it is a failure to change the state of the PPB
Lock bit because it is still protected by the lack of a valid password.
■
The Password Unlock command cannot be accepted any faster than once every 100 µs ± 20 µs. This makes it take an unreasonably
long time (58 million years) for a hacker to run through all the 64-bit combinations in an attempt to correctly match a password. The
Read Status Register 1 command may be used to read the WIP bit to determine when the device has completed the password
unlock command or is ready to accept a new password command. When a valid password is provided the password unlock command
does not insert the 100 µs delay before returning the WIP bit to zero.
■
If the password is lost after selecting the Password Mode, there is no way to set the PPB Lock bit.
■
ECC status may only be read from sectors that are readable. In read protection mode the addresses are forced to the boot sector
address. ECC status is shown in that sector while read protection mode is active.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 61 of 136
S25FL512S
9. Commands
All communication between the host system and the S25FL512S memory device is in the form of units called commands.
All commands begin with an instruction that selects the type of information transfer or device operation to be performed. Commands
may also have an address, instruction modifier, latency period, data transfer to the memory, or data transfer from the memory. All
instruction, address, and data information is transferred serially between the host system and memory device.
All instructions are transferred from host to memory as a single bit serial sequence on the SI signal.
Single bit wide commands may provide an address or data sent only on the SI signal. Data may be sent back to the host serially on
SO signal.
Dual or Quad Output commands provide an address sent to the memory only on the SI signal. Data will be returned to the host as a
sequence of bit pairs on I/O0 and I/O1 or four bit (nibble) groups on I/O0, I/O1, I/O2, and I/O3.
Dual or Quad Input/Output (I/O) commands provide an address sent from the host as bit pairs on I/O0 and I/O1 or, four bit (nibble)
groups on I/O0, I/O1, I/O2, and I/O3. Data is returned to the host similarly as bit pairs on I/O0 and I/O1 or, four bit (nibble) groups on
I/O0, I/O1, I/O2, and I/O3.
Commands are structured as follows:
■
Each command begins with an eight bit (byte) instruction.
■
The instruction may be stand alone or may be followed by address bits to select a location within one of several address spaces in
the device. The address may be either a 24-bit or 32-bit byte boundary address.
■
The Serial Peripheral Interface with Multiple I/O provides the option for each transfer of address and data information to be done
one, two, or four bits in parallel. This enables a trade off between the number of signal connections (I/O bus width) and the speed
of information transfer. If the host system can support a two or four bit wide I/O bus the memory performance can be increased by
using the instructions that provide parallel two bit (dual) or parallel four bit (quad) transfers.
■
The width of all transfers following the instruction are determined by the instruction sent.
■
All sIngle bits or parallel bit groups are transferred in most to least significant bit order.
■
Some instructions send instruction modifier (mode) bits following the address to indicate that the next command will be of the same
type with an implied, rather than an explicit, instruction. The next command thus does not provide an instruction byte, only a new
address and mode bits. This reduces the time needed to send each command when the same command type is repeated in a
sequence of commands.
■
The address or mode bits may be followed by write data to be stored in the memory device or by a read latency period before read
data is returned to the host.
■
Read latency may be zero to several SCK cycles (also referred to as dummy cycles).
■
All instruction, address, mode, and data information is transferred in byte granularity. Addresses are shifted into the device with the
MSB first. All data is transferred with the lowest address byte sent first. Following bytes of data are sent in lowest to highest byte
address order i.e. the byte address increments.
■
All attempts to read the flash memory array during a program, erase, or a write cycle (embedded operations) are ignored. The
embedded operation will continue to execute without any affect. A very limited set of commands are accepted during an embedded
operation. These are discussed in the individual command descriptions. While a program, erase, or write operation is in progress,
it is recommended to check that the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is 0 before issuing most commands to the device, to ensure the
new command can be accepted.
■
Depending on the command, the time for execution varies. A command to read status information from an executing command is
available to determine when the command completes execution and whether the command was successful.
■
Although host software in some cases is used to directly control the SPI interface signals, the hardware interfaces of the host system
and the memory device generally handle the details of signal relationships and timing. For this reason, signal relationships and
timing are not covered in detail within this software interface focused section of the document. Instead, the focus is on the logical
sequence of bits transferred in each command rather than the signal timing and relationships. Following are some general signal
relationship descriptions to keep in mind. For additional information on the bit level format and signal timing relationships of
commands, see Section 3.2 Command Protocol on page 14.
❐ The host always controls the Chip Select (CS#), Serial Clock (SCK), and Serial Input (SI) - SI for single bit wide transfers. The
memory drives Serial Output (SO) for single bit read transfers. The host and memory alternately drive the I/O0-I/O3 signals during
Dual and Quad transfers.
❐ All commands begin with the host selecting the memory by driving CS# low before the first rising edge of SCK. CS# is kept low
throughout a command and when CS# is returned high the command ends. Generally, CS# remains low for eight bit transfer
multiples to transfer byte granularity information. Some commands will not be accepted if CS# is returned high not at an 8 bit
boundary.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 62 of 136
S25FL512S
9.1 Command Set Summary
9.1.1
Extended Addressing
To accommodate addressing above 128 Mb, there are three options:
1. New instructions are provided with 4-byte address, used to access up to 32 Gb of memory.
Instruction Name
Description
Code (Hex)
4FAST_READ
Read Fast (4-byte Address)
0C
4READ
Read (4-byte Address)
13
4DOR
Read Dual Out (4-byte Address)
3C
4QOR
Read Quad Out (4-byte Address)
6C
4DIOR
Dual I/O Read (4-byte Address)
BC
4QIOR
Quad I/O Read (4-byte Address)
EC
4DDRFR
Read DDR Fast (4-byte Address)
0E
4DDRDIOR
DDR Dual I/O Read (4-byte Address)
BE
4DDRQIOR
DDR Quad I/O Read (4-byte Address)
EE
4PP
Page Program (4-byte Address)
12
4QPP
Quad Page Program (4-byte Address)
34
4SE
Erase 256 kB (4-byte Address)
DC
2. For backward compatibility to the 3-byte address instructions, the standard instructions can be used in conjunction with the EXTADD
Bit in the Bank Address Register (BAR[7]). By default BAR[7] is cleared to 0 (following power up and hardware reset), to enable
3-byte (24-bit) addressing. When set to 1, the legacy commands are changed to require 4 bytes (32 bits) for the address field. The
following instructions can be used in conjunction with EXTADD bit to switch from 3 bytes to 4 bytes of address field.
Instruction Name
Description
Code (Hex)
READ
Read (3-byte Address)
03
FAST_READ
Read Fast (3-byte Address)
0B
DOR
Read Dual Out (3-byte Address)
3B
QOR
Read Quad Out (3-byte Address)
6B
DIOR
Dual I/O Read (3-byte Address)
BB
QIOR
Quad I/O Read (3-byte Address)
EB
DDRFR
Read DDR Fast (3-byte Address)
0D
DDRDIOR
DDR Dual I/O Read (3-byte Address)
BD
DDRQIOR
DDR Quad I/O Read (3-byte Address)
ED
PP
Page Program (3-byte Address)
02
QPP
Quad Page Program (3-byte Address)
32
SE
Erase 256 kB (3-byte Address)
D8
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 63 of 136
S25FL512S
3. For backward compatibility to the 3-byte addressing, the standard instructions can be used in conjunction with the Bank Address
Register:
a. The Bank Address Register is used to switch between 128-Mb (16-MB) banks of memory, The standard 3-byte
address selects an address within the bank selected by the Bank Address Register.
i. The host system writes the Bank Address Register to access beyond the first 128 Mb of memory.
ii. This applies to read, erase, and program commands.
b. The Bank Register provides the high order (4th) byte of address, which is used to address the available memory at
addresses greater than 16 MB.
c. Bank Register bits are volatile.
i. On power up, the default is Bank0 (the lowest address 16 MB).
d. For Read, the device will continuously transfer out data until the end of the array.
i. There is no bank to bank delay.
ii. The Bank Address Register is not updated.
iii. The Bank Address Register value is used only for the initial address of an access.
Table 38. Bank Address Map
Bank Address Register Bits
Bank
Memory Array Address Range (Hex)
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
00000000
00FFFFFF
0
1
1
01000000
01FFFFFF
1
0
2
02000000
02FFFFFF
1
1
3
03000000
03FFFFFF
Table 39. S25FL512S Command Set (sorted by function)
Function
Instruction
Value (Hex)
Maximum
Frequency
(MHz)
Read Electronic Manufacturer Signature
90
133
RDID
Read ID (JEDEC Manufacturer ID and JEDEC CFI)
9F
133
RES
Command
Name
READ_ID
(REMS)
Read Device
Identification
Register Access
Command Description
Read Electronic Signature
AB
50
RSFDP
Read Serial Flash Discoverable Parameters
5A
133
RDSR1
Read Status Register-1
05
133
RDSR2
Read Status Register-2
07
133
RDCR
Read Configuration Register-1
35
133
WRR
Write Register (Status-1, Configuration-1)
01
133
WRDI
Write Disable
04
133
WREN
Write Enable
06
133
Clear Status Register-1 - Erase/Prog. Fail Reset
30
133
ECC Read (4-byte address
18
133
14
133
(QUAD=0)
104
(QUAD=1)
CLSR
ECCRD
ABRD
AutoBoot Register Read
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 64 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 39. S25FL512S Command Set (sorted by function) (Continued)
Function
Register Access
Command
Name
Command Description
AutoBoot Register Write
15
133
BRRD
Bank Register Read
16
133
BRWR
Bank Register Write
17
133
BRAC
Bank Register Access
(Legacy Command formerly used for Deep Power Down)
B9
133
Data Learning Pattern Read
41
133
Program NV Data Learning Register
43
133
PNVDLR
WVDLR
Write Volatile Data Learning Register
4A
133
READ
Read (3- or 4-byte address)
03
50
4READ
Read (4-byte address)
13
50
Fast Read (3- or 4-byte address)
0B
133
FAST_READ
4FAST_READ Fast Read (4-byte address)
0C
133
DDRFR
DDR Fast Read (3- or 4-byte address)
0D
80
4DDRFR
DDR Fast Read (4-byte address)
0E
80
Read Dual Out (3- or 4-byte address)
3B
104
4DOR
Read Dual Out (4-byte address)
3C
104
QOR
Read Quad Out (3- or 4-byte address)
6B
104
4QOR
Read Quad Out (4-byte address)
6C
104
DIOR
Dual I/O Read (3- or 4-byte address)
BB
104
DOR
4DIOR
Dual I/O Read (4-byte address)
BC
104
DDRDIOR
DDR Dual I/O Read (3- or 4-byte address)
BD
80
4DDRDIOR
DDR Dual I/O Read (4-byte address)
BE
80
QIOR
Quad I/O Read (3- or 4-byte address)
EB
104
4QIOR
Program Flash
Array
Erase Flash
Array
Maximum
Frequency
(MHz)
ABWR
DLPRD
Read Flash Array
Instruction
Value (Hex)
Quad I/O Read (4-byte address)
EC
104
DDRQIOR
DDR Quad I/O Read (3- or 4-byte address)
ED
80
4DDRQIOR
DDR Quad I/O Read (4-byte address)
EE
80
PP
Page Program (3- or 4-byte address)
02
133
4PP
Page Program (4-byte address)
12
133
QPP
Quad Page Program (3- or 4-byte address)
32
80
QPP
Quad Page Program - Alternate instruction (3- or 4-byte address)
38
80
4QPP
Quad Page Program (4-byte address)
34
80
PGSP
Program Suspend
85
133
PGRS
Program Resume
8A
133
BE
Bulk Erase
60
133
BE
Bulk Erase (alternate command)
C7
133
SE
Erase 256 kB (3- or 4-byte address)
D8
133
4SE
Erase 256 kB (4-byte address)
DC
133
ERSP
Erase Suspend
75
133
ERRS
Erase Resume
7A
133
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 65 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 39. S25FL512S Command Set (sorted by function) (Continued)
Function
One Time
Program Array
Advanced Sector
Protection
Command
Name
Reserved for
Future Use
Instruction
Value (Hex)
Maximum
Frequency
(MHz)
OTPP
OTP Program
42
133
OTPR
OTP Read
4B
133
DYBRD
DYB Read
E0
133
DYBWR
DYB Write
E1
133
PPBRD
PPB Read
E2
133
PPBP
PPB Program
E3
133
PPBE
PPB Erase
E4
133
ASPRD
ASP Read
2B
133
ASP Program
2F
133
PLBRD
PPB Lock Bit Read
A7
133
PLBWR
PPB Lock Bit Write
A6
133
ASPP
PASSRD
Reset
Command Description
Password Read
E7
133
PASSP
Password Program
E8
133
PASSU
Password Unlock
E9
133
RESET
Software Reset
F0
133
MBR
Mode Bit Reset
FF
133
MPM
Reserved for Multi-I/O-High Perf Mode (MPM)
A3
133
RFU
Reserved-18
Reserved
18
RFU
Reserved-E5
Reserved
E5
RFU
Reserved-E6
Reserved
E6
9.1.2
Read Device Identification
There are multiple commands to read information about the device manufacturer, device type, and device features. SPI memories
from different vendors have used different commands and formats for reading information about the memories. The S25FL512S
device supports the three most common device information commands.
9.1.3
Register Read or Write
There are multiple registers for reporting embedded operation status or controlling device configuration options. There are commands
for reading or writing these registers. Registers contain both volatile and nonvolatile bits. Nonvolatile bits in registers are automatically
erased and programmed as a single (write) operation.
9.1.3.1
Monitoring Operation Status
The host system can determine when a write, program, erase, suspend or other embedded operation is complete by monitoring the
Write in Progress (WIP) bit in the Status Register. The Read from Status Register-1 command provides the state of the WIP bit. The
program error (P_ERR) and erase error (E_ERR) bits in the status register indicate whether the most recent program or erase
command has not completed successfully. When P_ERR or E_ERR bits are set to one, the WIP bit will remain set to one indicating
the device remains busy. Under this condition, only the CLSR, WRDI, RDSR1, RDSR2, and software RESET commands are valid
commands. A Clear Status Register (CLSR) followed by a Write Disable (WRDI) command must be sent to return the device to standby
state. CLSR clears the WIP, P_ERR, and E_ERR bits. WRDI clears the WEL bit. Alternatively, Hardware Reset, or Software Reset
(RESET) may be used to return the device to standby state.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 66 of 136
S25FL512S
9.1.3.2
Configuration
There are commands to read, write, and protect registers that control interface path width, interface timing, interface address length,
and some aspects of data protection.
9.1.4
Read Flash Array
Data may be read from the memory starting at any byte boundary. Data bytes are sequentially read from incrementally higher byte
addresses until the host ends the data transfer by driving CS# input High. If the byte address reaches the maximum address of the
memory array, the read will continue at address zero of the array.
There are several different read commands to specify different access latency and data path widths. Double Data Rate (DDR)
commands also define the address and data bit relationship to both SCK edges:
■
The Read command provides a single address bit per SCK rising edge on the SI signal with read data returning a single bit per SCK
falling edge on the SO signal. This command has zero latency between the address and the returning data but is limited to a maximum
SCK rate of 50 MHz.
■
Other read commands have a latency period between the address and returning data but can operate at higher SCK frequencies.
The latency depends on the configuration register latency code.
■
The Fast Read command provides a single address bit per SCK rising edge on the SI signal with read data returning a single bit
per SCK falling edge on the SO signal and may operate up to 133 MHz.
■
Dual or Quad Output read commands provide address a single bit per SCK rising edge on the SI / I/O0 signal with read data returning
two bits, or four bits of data per SCK falling edge on the I/O0-I/O3 signals.
■
Dual or Quad I/O Read commands provide address two bits or four bits per SCK rising edge with read data returning two bits, or
four bits of data per SCK falling edge on the I/O0-I/O3 signals.
■
Fast (Single), Dual, or Quad Double Data Rate read commands provide address one bit, two bits or four bits per every SCK edge
with read data returning one bit, two bits, or four bits of data per every SCK edge on the I/O0-I/O3 signals. Double Data Rate (DDR)
operation is only supported for core and I/O voltages of 3 to 3.6V.
9.1.5
Program Flash Array
Programming data requires two commands: Write Enable (WREN), and Page Program (PP or QPP). The Page Program command
accepts from 1 byte up to 512 consecutive bytes of data (page) to be programmed in one operation. Programming means that bits
can either be left at 1, or programmed from 1 to 0. Changing bits from 0 to 1 requires an erase operation.
9.1.6
Erase Flash Array
The Sector Erase (SE) and Bulk Erase (BE) commands set all the bits in a sector or the entire memory array to 1. A bit needs to be
first erased to 1 before programming can change it to a 0. While bits can be individually programmed from a 1 to 0, erasing bits from
0 to 1 must be done on a sector-wide (SE) or array-wide (BE) level.
9.1.7
OTP, Block Protection, and Advanced Sector Protection
There are commands to read and program a separate One TIme Programmable (OTP) array for permanent data such as a serial
number. There are commands to control a contiguous group (block) of flash memory array sectors that are protected from program
and erase operations. There are commands to control which individual flash memory array sectors are protected from program and
erase operations.
9.1.8
Reset
There is a command to reset to the default conditions present after power on to the device. There is a command to reset (exit from)
the Enhanced Performance Read Modes.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 67 of 136
S25FL512S
9.1.9
Reserved
Some instructions are reserved for future use. In this generation of the S25FL512S some of these command instructions may be
unused and not affect device operation, some may have undefined results.
Some commands are reserved to ensure that a legacy or alternate source device command is allowed without affect. This allows
legacy software to issue some commands that are not relevant for the current generation S25FL512S device with the assurance these
commands do not cause some unexpected action.
Some commands are reserved for use in special versions of the FL-S not addressed by this document or for a future generation. This
allows new host memory controller designs to plan the flexibility to issue these command instructions. The command format is defined
if known at the time this document revision is published.
9.2 Identification Commands
9.2.1
Read Identification - REMS (Read_ID or REMS 90h)
The READ_ID command identifies the Device Manufacturer ID and the Device ID. The command is also referred to as Read Electronic
Manufacturer and device Signature (REMS). READ-ID (REMS) is only supported for backward compatibility and should not be used
for new software designs. New software designs should instead make use of the RDID command.
The command is initiated by shifting on SI the instruction code “90h” followed by a 24-bit address of 00000h. Following this, the
Manufacturer ID and the Device ID are shifted out on SO starting at the falling edge of SCK after address. The Manufacturer ID and
the Device ID are always shifted out with the MSb first. If the 24-bit address is set to 000001h, then the Device ID is read out first
followed by the Manufacturer ID. The Manufacturer ID and Device ID output data toggles between address 000000H and 000001H
until terminated by a low to high transition on CS# input. The maximum clock frequency for the READ_ID command is
133 MHz.
Figure 47. READ_ID (90h) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4 3
2
1 0 23
1 0
SO
7
Instruction (90h)
Phase
Address
6 5 4 3 2 1
Manufacturer ID
0
7 6
5 4 3 2 1 0
Device ID
Table 40. Read_ID Values
Device
Manufacturer ID (hex)
Device ID (hex)
S25FL512S
01
19
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 68 of 136
S25FL512S
9.2.2
Read Identification (RDID 9Fh)
The Read Identification (RDID) command provides read access to manufacturer identification, device identification, and Common
Flash Interface (CFI) information. The manufacturer identification is assigned by JEDEC. The CFI structure is defined by JEDEC
standard. The device identification and CFI values are assigned by Cypress.
The JEDEC Common Flash Interface (CFI) specification defines a device information structure, which allows a vendor-specified
software flash management program (driver) to be used for entire families of flash devices. Software support can then be
device-independent, JEDEC manufacturer ID independent, forward and backward-compatible for the specified flash device families.
System vendors can standardize their flash drivers for long-term software compatibility by using the CFI values to configure a family
driver from the CFI information of the device in use.
Any RDID command issued while a program, erase, or write cycle is in progress is ignored and has no effect on execution of the
program, erase, or write cycle that is in progress.
The RDID instruction is shifted on SI. After the last bit of the RDID instruction is shifted into the device, a byte of manufacturer
identification, two bytes of device identification, extended device identification, and CFI information will be shifted sequentially out on
SO. As a whole this information is referred to as ID-CFI. See Section 7.3 ID-CFI Address Space on page 44 for the detail description
of the ID-CFI contents.
Continued shifting of output beyond the end of the defined ID-CFI address space will provide undefined data. The RDID command
sequence is terminated by driving CS# to the logic high state anytime during data output.
The maximum clock frequency for the RDID command is 133 MHz.
Figure 48. Read Identification (RDID 9Fh) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
SO
1
0
7
Phase
9.2.3
2
6
5
Instruction
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
Data 1
4
3
2
1
0
Data N
Read Electronic Signature (RES) (ABh)
The RES command is used to read a single byte Electronic Signature from SO. RES is only supported for backward compatibility and
should not be used for new software designs. New software designs should instead make use of the RDID command.
The RES instruction is shifted in followed by three dummy bytes onto SI. After the last bit of the three dummy bytes are shifted into
the device, a byte of Electronic Signature will be shifted out of SO. Each bit is shifted out by the falling edge of SCK. The maximum
clock frequency for the RES command is 50 MHz.
The Electronic Signature can be read repeatedly by applying multiples of eight clock cycles.
The RES command sequence is terminated by driving CS# to the logic high state anytime during data output.
Figure 49. Read Electronic Signature (RES ABh) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 23
1 0
SO
Phase
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Instruction (ABh)
Dummy
Device ID
Table 41. RES Values
Device
Device ID (hex)
S25FL512S
19
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 69 of 136
S25FL512S
9.2.4
Read Serial Flash Discoverable Parameters (RSFDP 5Ah)
The command is initiated by shifting on SI the instruction code ‘5Ah’, followed by a 24-bit address of 000000h, followed by eight dummy
cycles. The SFDP bytes are then shifted out on SO starting at the falling edge of SCK after the eight dummy cycles. The SFDP bytes
are always shifted out with the MSb first. If the 24-bit address is set to any other value, the selected location in the SFDP space is the
starting point of the data read. This enables random access to any parameter in the SFDP space. The maximum clock frequency for
the RSFDP command is 133 MHz.
Figure 50. RSFDP Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4 3
2
1 0 23
1 0
SO
7 6
Phase
Instruction
Address
Dummy Cycles
5
4
3
2 1
0
Data 1
9.3 Register Access Commands
9.3.1
Read Status Register-1 (RDSR1 05h)
The Read Status Register-1 (RDSR1) command allows the Status Register-1 contents to be read from SO. The Status Register-1
contents may be read at any time, even while a program, erase, or write operation is in progress. It is possible to read the Status
Register-1 continuously by providing multiples of eight clock cycles. The status is updated for each eight cycle read. The maximum
clock frequency for the RDSR1 (05h) command is 133 MHz.
Figure 51. Read Status Register-1 (RDSR1 05h) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SO
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Phase
9.3.2
Instruction
Status
Updated Status
Read Status Register-2 (RDSR2 07h)
The Read Status Register (RDSR2) command allows the Status Register-2 contents to be read from SO. The Status Register-2
contents may be read at any time, even while a program, erase, or write operation is in progress. It is possible to read the Status
Register-2 continuously by providing multiples of eight clock cycles. The status is updated for each eight cycle read. The maximum
clock frequency for the RDSR2 command is 133 MHz.
Figure 52. Read Status Register-2 (RDSR2 07h) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SO
Phase
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Instruction
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Status
Updated Status
Page 70 of 136
S25FL512S
9.3.3
Read Configuration Register (RDCR 35h)
The Read Configuration Register (RDCR) command allows the Configuration Register contents to be read from SO. It is possible to
read the Configuration Register continuously by providing multiples of eight clock cycles. The Configuration Register contents may
be read at any time, even while a program, erase, or write operation is in progress.
Figure 53. Read Configuration Register (RDCR 35h) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
7
Phase
9.3.4
6
Instruction
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
Register Read
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Repeat Register Read
Bank Register Read (BRRD 16h)
The Read the Bank Register (BRRD) command allows the Bank address Register contents to be read from SO. The instruction is first
shifted in from SI. Then the 8-bit Bank Register is shifted out on SO. It is possible to read the Bank Register continuously by providing
multiples of eight clock cycles. The maximum operating clock frequency for the BRRD command is 133 MHz.
Figure 54. Read Bank Register (BRRD 16h) Command
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
7
9.3.5
6
Instruction
Phase
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
Register Read
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Repeat Register Read
Bank Register Write (BRWR 17h)
The Bank Register Write (BRWR) command is used to write address bits above A23, into the Bank Address Register (BAR). The
command is also used to write the Extended address control bit (EXTADD) that is also in BAR[7]. BAR provides the high order
addresses needed by devices having more than 128 Mb (16 MB), when using 3-byte address commands without extended addressing
enabled (BAR[7] EXTADD = 0). Because this command is part of the addressing method and is not changing data in the flash memory,
this command does not require the WREN command to precede it.
The BRWR instruction is entered, followed by the data byte on SI. The Bank Register is one data byte in length.
The BRWR command has no effect on the P_ERR, E_ERR or WIP bits of the Status and Configuration Registers. Any bank address
bit reserved for the future should always be written as a 0.
Figure 55. Bank Register Write (BRWR 17h) Command
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Phase
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Instruction
Input Data
Page 71 of 136
S25FL512S
9.3.6
Bank Register Access (BRAC B9h)
The Bank Register Read and Write commands provide full access to the Bank Address Register (BAR) but they are both commands
that are not present in legacy SPI memory devices. Host system SPI memory controller interfaces may not be able to easily support
such new commands. The Bank Register Access (BRAC) command uses the same command code and format as the Deep Power
Down (DPD) command that is available in legacy SPI memories. The FL-S family does not support a DPD feature but assigns this
legacy command code to the BRAC command to enable write access to the Bank Address Register for legacy systems that are able
to send the legacy DPD (B9h) command.
When the BRAC command is sent, the FL-S family device will then interpret an immediately following Write Register (WRR) command
as a write to the lower address bits of the BAR. A WREN command is not used between the BRAC and WRR commands. Only the
lower two bits of the first data byte following the WRR command code are used to load BAR[1:0]. The upper bits of that byte and the
content of the optional WRR command second data byte are ignored. Following the WRR command the access to BAR is closed and
the device interface returns to the standby state. The combined BRAC followed by WRR command sequence has no affect on the
value of the ExtAdd bit (BAR[7]).
Commands other than WRR may immediately follow BRAC and execute normally. However, any command other than WRR, or any
other sequence in which CS# goes low and returns high, following a BRAC command, will close the access to BAR and return to the
normal interpretation of a WRR command as a write to Status Register-1 and the Configuration Register.
The BRAC + WRR sequence is allowed only when the device is in standby, program suspend, or erase suspend states. This command
sequence is illegal when the device is performing an embedded algorithm or when the program (P_ERR) or erase (E_ERR) status
bits are set to 1.
Figure 56. BRAC (B9h) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Phase
9.3.7
Instruction
Write Registers (WRR 01h)
The Write Registers (WRR) command allows new values to be written to both the Status Register-1 and Configuration Register. Before
the Write Registers (WRR) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be received. After the
Write Enable (WREN) command has been decoded successfully, the device will set the Write Enable Latch (WEL) in the Status
Register to enable any write operations.
The Write Registers (WRR) command is entered by shifting the instruction and the data bytes on SI. The Status Register is one data
byte in length.
The Write Registers (WRR) command will set the P_ERR or E_ERR bits if there is a failure in the WRR operation. Any Status or
Configuration Register bit reserved for the future must be written as a 0.
CS# must be driven to the logic high state after the eighth or sixteenth bit of data has been latched. If not, the Write Registers (WRR)
command is not executed. If CS# is driven high after the eighth cycle then only the Status Register-1 is written; otherwise, after the
sixteenth cycle both the Status and Configuration Registers are written. When the configuration register QUAD bit CR[1] is 1, only the
WRR command format with 16 data bits may be used.
As soon as CS# is driven to the logic high state, the self-timed Write Registers (WRR) operation is initiated. While the Write Registers
(WRR) operation is in progress, the Status Register may still be read to check the value of the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In
Progress (WIP) bit is a 1 during the self-timed Write Registers (WRR) operation, and is a 0 when it is completed. When the Write
Registers (WRR) operation is completed, the Write Enable Latch (WEL) is set to a 0. The WRR command must be executed under
continuous power. The maximum clock frequency for the WRR command is 133 MHz.
Figure 57. Write Registers (WRR 01h) Command Sequence – 8 data bits
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Phase
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Instruction
Input Status Register-1
Page 72 of 136
S25FL512S
Figure 58. Write Registers (WRR 01h) Command Sequence – 16 data bits
CS#
SCK
SI
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SO
Phase
Instruction
Input Status Register-1
Input Configuration Register
The Write Registers (WRR) command allows the user to change the values of the Block Protect (BP2, BP1, and BP0) bits to define
the size of the area that is to be treated as read-only. The Write Registers (WRR) command also allows the user to set the Status
Register Write Disable (SRWD) bit to a 1 or a 0. The Status Register Write Disable (SRWD) bit and Write Protect (WP#) signal allow
the BP bits to be hardware protected.
When the Status Register Write Disable (SRWD) bit of the Status Register is a 0 (its initial delivery state), it is possible to write to the
Status Register provided that the Write Enable Latch (WEL) bit has previously been set by a Write Enable (WREN) command,
regardless of the whether Write Protect (WP#) signal is driven to the logic high or logic low state.
When the Status Register Write Disable (SRWD) bit of the Status Register is set to a 1, two cases need to be considered, depending
on the state of Write Protect (WP#):
■
If Write Protect (WP#) signal is driven to the logic high state, it is possible to write to the Status and Configuration Registers provided
that the Write Enable Latch (WEL) bit has previously been set to a “1” by initiating a Write Enable (WREN) command.
■
If Write Protect (WP#) signal is driven to the logic low state, it is not possible to write to the Status and Configuration Registers even
if the Write Enable Latch (WEL) bit has previously been set to a 1 by a Write Enable (WREN) command. Attempts to write to the
Status and Configuration Registers are rejected, and are not accepted for execution. As a consequence, all the data bytes in the
memory area that are protected by the Block Protect (BP2, BP1, BP0) bits of the Status Register, are also hardware protected by WP#.
The WP# hardware protection can be provided:
■
by setting the Status Register Write Disable (SRWD) bit after driving Write Protect (WP#) signal to the logic low state;
■
or by driving Write Protect (WP#) signal to the logic low state after setting the Status Register Write Disable (SRWD) bit to a 1.
The only way to release the hardware protection is to pull the Write Protect (WP#) signal to the logic high state. If WP# is permanently
tied high, hardware protection of the BP bits can never be activated.
Table 42. Block Protection Modes
WP#
SRWD
Bit
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
Mode
Write Protection of Registers
Memory Content
Protected Area
Unprotected Area
Software
Protected
Protected against
Status and Configuration Registers are Writable
Page Program,
(if WREN command has set the WEL bit). The
Quad Input
values in the SRWD, BP2, BP1, and BP0 bits
Program, Sector
and those in the Configuration Register can be
Erase, and Bulk
changed
Erase
Ready to accept
Page Program,
Quad Input Program
and Sector Erase
commands
Hardware
Protected
Status and Configuration Registers are
Hardware Write Protected. The values in the
SRWD, BP2, BP1, and BP0 bits and those in the
Configuration Register cannot be changed
Ready to accept
Page Program or
Erase commands
Protected against
Page Program,
Sector Erase, and
Bulk Erase
Notes
45. The Status Register originally shows 00h when the device is first shipped from Cypress to the customer.
46. Hardware protection is disabled when Quad Mode is enabled (QUAD bit = 1 in Configuration Register). WP# becomes I/O2; therefore, it cannot be utilized.
The WRR command has an alternate function of loading the Bank Address Register if the command immediately follows a BRAC
command. See Section 9.3.6 Bank Register Access (BRAC B9h) on page 72.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 73 of 136
S25FL512S
9.3.8
Write Enable (WREN 06h)
The Write Enable (WREN) command sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) bit of the Status Register 1 (SR1[1]) to a 1. The Write Enable
Latch (WEL) bit must be set to a 1 by issuing the Write Enable (WREN) command to enable write, program and erase commands.
CS# must be driven into the logic high state after the eighth bit of the instruction byte has been latched in on SI. Without CS# being
driven to the logic high state after the eighth bit of the instruction byte has been latched in on SI, the write enable operation will not
be executed.
Figure 59. Write Enable (WREN 06h) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Phase
9.3.9
Instruction
Write Disable (WRDI 04h)
The Write Disable (WRDI) command sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) bit of the Status Register-1 (SR1[1]) to a 0.
The Write Enable Latch (WEL) bit may be set to a 0 by issuing the Write Disable (WRDI) command to disable Page Program (PP),
Sector Erase (SE), Bulk Erase (BE), Write Registers (WRR), OTP Program (OTPP), and other commands, that require WEL be set
to 1 for execution. The WRDI command can be used by the user to protect memory areas against inadvertent writes that can possibly
corrupt the contents of the memory. The WRDI command is ignored during an embedded operation while WIP bit =1.
CS# must be driven into the logic high state after the eighth bit of the instruction byte has been latched in on SI. Without CS# being
driven to the logic high state after the eighth bit of the instruction byte has been latched in on SI, the write disable operation will not
be executed.
Figure 60. Write Disable (WRDI 04h) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Phase
Instruction
9.3.10 Clear Status Register (CLSR 30h):
The Clear Status Register command resets bit SR1[5] (Erase Fail Flag) and bit SR1[6] (Program Fail Flag). It is not necessary to set
the WEL bit before the Clear SR command is executed. The Clear SR command will be accepted even when the device remains busy
with WIP set to 1, as the device does remain busy when either error bit is set. The WEL bit will be unchanged after this command is
executed.
Figure 61. Clear Status Register (CLSR 30h) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Phase
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Instruction
Page 74 of 136
S25FL512S
9.3.11
ECC Status Register Read (ECCRD 18h)
To read the ECC Status Register, the command is followed by the ECC unit (16 Bytes) address, the four least significant bits (LSb) of
address must be set to zero. This is followed by the number of dummy cycles selected by the read latency value in CR2V[3:0]. Then
the 8-bit contents of the ECC Register, for the ECC unit selected, are shifted out on SO 16 times, once for each byte in the ECC Unit.
If CS# remains low the next ECC unit status is sent through SO/I/O1 16 times, once for each byte in the ECC Unit, this continues until
CS# goes high. The maximum operating clock frequency for the ECC READ command is 133 MHz. See Section 9.5.1.1 Automatic
ECC on page 92 for details on ECC unit.
Figure 62. ECC Status Register Read Command Sequence
CS#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
SCK
32-Bit
Address
Instruction
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
31 30 29
3
Dummy Byte
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DATA OUT 1
SO
High Impedance
7
6
5
4
MSB
3
2
DATA OUT 2
1
0
7
MSB
9.3.12 AutoBoot
SPI devices normally require 32 or more cycles of command and address shifting to initiate a read command. And, in order to read
boot code from an SPI device, the host memory controller or processor must supply the read command from a hardwired state machine
or from some host processor internal ROM code.
Parallel NOR devices need only an initial address, supplied in parallel in a single cycle, and initial access time to start reading boot
code.
The AutoBoot feature allows the host memory controller to take boot code from an S25FL512S device immediately after the end of
reset, without having to send a read command. This saves 32 or more cycles and simplifies the logic needed to initiate the reading
of boot code.
■
As part of the power up reset, hardware reset, or command reset process the AutoBoot feature automatically starts a read access
from a pre-specified address. At the time the reset process is completed, the device is ready to deliver code from the starting address.
The host memory controller only needs to drive CS# signal from high to low and begin toggling the SCK signal. The S25FL512S
device will delay code output for a pre-specified number of clock cycles before code streams out.
❐ The Auto Boot Start Delay (ABSD) field of the AutoBoot register specifies the initial delay if any is needed by the host.
❐ The host cannot send commands during this time.
❐ If ABSD = 0, the maximum SCK frequency is 50 MHz.
❐ If ABSD > 0, the maximum SCK frequency is 133 MHz if the QUAD bit CR1[1] is 0 or 104 MHz if the QUAD bit is set to 1.
■
The starting address of the boot code is selected by the value programmed into the AutoBoot Start Address (ABSA) field of the
AutoBoot Register which specifies a 512 byte boundary aligned location; the default address is 00000000h.
❐ Data will continuously shift out until CS# returns high.
■
At any point after the first data byte is transferred, when CS# returns high, the SPI device will reset to standard SPI mode; able to
accept normal command operations.
❐ A minimum of one byte must be transferred.
❐ AutoBoot mode will not initiate again until another power cycle or a reset occurs.
■
An AutoBoot Enable bit (ABE) is set to enable the AutoBoot feature.
The AutoBoot register bits are nonvolatile and provide:
■
The starting address (512-byte boundary), set by the AutoBoot Start Address (ABSA). The size of the ABSA field is 23 bits for
devices up to 32-Gbit.
■
The number of initial delay cycles, set by the AutoBoot Start Delay (ABSD) 8-bit count value.
■
The AutoBoot Enable.
If the configuration register QUAD bit CR1[1] is set to 1, the boot code will be provided 4 bits per cycle in the same manner as a Read
Quad Out command. If the QUAD bit is 0 the code is delivered serially in the same manner as a Read command.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 75 of 136
S25FL512S
Figure 63. AutoBoot Sequence (CR1[1]=0)
CS#
SCK
SI
SO
Phase
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Wait States (ABSD)
Data 1
Data N
Figure 64. AutoBoot Sequence (CR1[1]=1)
CS#
SCK
IO0
4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4
IO1
5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5
IO2
6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6
IO3
7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7
Phase
Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 ...
Wait States (ABSD)
9.3.13 AutoBoot Register Read (ABRD 14h)
The AutoBoot Register Read command is shifted into SI. Then the 32-bit AutoBoot Register is shifted out on SO, LSB first, most
significant bit of each byte first. It is possible to read the AutoBoot Register continuously by providing multiples of 32 clock cycles. If
the QUAD bit CR1[1] is cleared to 0, the maximum operating clock frequency for ABRD command is 133 MHz. If the QUAD bit CR1[1]
is set to 1, the maximum operating clock frequency for ABRD command is 104 MHz.
Figure 65. AutoBoot Register Read (ABRD 14h) Command
CS#
SCK
SI
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SO
Phase
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Instruction
Data 1
Data N
9.3.14 AutoBoot Register Write (ABWR 15h)
Before the ABWR command can be accepted, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued and decoded by the device, which
sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.
The ABWR command is entered by shifting the instruction and the data bytes on SI, LSB first, most significant bit of each byte first.
The ABWR data is 32 bits in length.
The ABWR command has status reported in Status Register-1 as both an erase and a programming operation. An E_ERR or a P_ERR
may be set depending on whether the erase or programming phase of updating the register fails.
CS# must be driven to the logic high state after the 32nd bit of data has been latched. If not, the ABWR command is not executed.
As soon as CS# is driven to the logic high state, the self-timed ABWR operation is initiated. While the ABWR operation is in progress,
Status Register-1 may be read to check the value of the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is a 1 during the
self-timed ABWR operation, and is a 0. when it is completed. When the ABWR cycle is completed, the Write Enable Latch (WEL) is
set to a 0. The maximum clock frequency for the ABWR command is 133 MHz.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 76 of 136
S25FL512S
Figure 66. AutoBoot Register Write (ABWR) Command
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
SO
Phase
Instruction
Input Data 1
9.3.15 Program NVDLR (PNVDLR 43h)
Before the Program NVDLR (PNVDLR) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued
and decoded by the device. After the Write Enable (WREN) command has been decoded successfully, the device will set the Write
Enable Latch (WEL) to enable the PNVDLR operation.
The PNVDLR command is entered by shifting the instruction and the data byte on SI.
CS# must be driven to the logic high state after the eighth (8th) bit of data has been latched. If not, the PNVDLR command is not
executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic high state, the self-timed PNVDLR operation is initiated. While the PNVDLR operation
is in progress, the Status Register may be read to check the value of the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit
is a 1 during the self-timed PNVDLR cycle, and is a 0. when it is completed. The PNVDLR operation can report a program error in the
P_ERR bit of the status register. When the PNVDLR operation is completed, the Write Enable Latch (WEL) is set to a 0 The maximum
clock frequency for the PNVDLR command is 133 MHz.
Figure 67. Program NVDLR (PNVDLR 43h) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Phase
Instruction
Input Data
9.3.16 Write VDLR (WVDLR 4Ah)
Before the Write VDLR (WVDLR) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued and
decoded by the device. After the Write Enable (WREN) command has been decoded successfully, the device will set the Write Enable
Latch (WEL) to enable WVDLR operation.
The WVDLR command is entered by shifting the instruction and the data byte on SI.
CS# must be driven to the logic high state after the eighth (8th) bit of data has been latched. If not, the WVDLR command is not
executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic high state, the WVDLR operation is initiated with no delays. The maximum clock
frequency for the PNVDLR command is 133 MHz.
Figure 68. Write VDLR (WVDLR 4Ah) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Phase
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Instruction
Input Data
Page 77 of 136
S25FL512S
9.3.17 Data Learning Pattern Read (DLPRD 41h)
The instruction is shifted on SI, then the 8-bit DLP is shifted out on SO. It is possible to read the DLP continuously by providing multiples
of eight clock cycles. The maximum operating clock frequency for the DLPRD command is 133 MHz.
Figure 69. DLP Read (DLPRD 41h) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
SO
Phase
2
1
0
7
Instruction
6
5
4
3
Data 1
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Data N
9.4 Read Memory Array Commands
Read commands for the main flash array provide many options for prior generation SPI compatibility or enhanced performance SPI:
■
Some commands transfer address or data on each rising edge of SCK. These are called Single Data Rate commands (SDR).
■
Some SDR commands transfer address one bit per rising edge of SCK and return data 1, 2, or 4 bits of data per rising edge of SCK.
These are called Read or Fast Read for 1-bit data; Dual Output Read for 2-bit data, and Quad Output for 4-bit data.
■
Some SDR commands transfer both address and data 2 or 4 bits per rising edge of SCK. These are called Dual I/O for 2 bit and
Quad I/O for 4 bit.
■
Some commands transfer address and data on both the rising edge and falling edge of SCK. These are called Double Data Rate
(DDR) commands.
■
There are DDR commands for 1, 2, or 4 bits of address or data per SCK edge. These are called Fast DDR for 1-bit, Dual I/O DDR
for 2-bit, and Quad I/O DDR for 4-bit per edge transfer.
All of these commands begin with an instruction code that is transferred one bit per SCK rising edge. The instruction is followed by
either a 3- or 4-byte address transferred at SDR or DDR. Commands transferring address or data 2 or 4 bits per clock edge are called
Multiple I/O (MIO) commands. For FL-S devices at
256 Mb or higher density, the traditional SPI 3-byte addresses are unable to directly address all locations in the memory array. These
device have a bank address register that is used with 3-byte address commands to supply the high order address bits beyond the
address from the host system. The default bank address is zero. Commands are provided to load and read the bank address register.
These devices may also be configured to take a 4-byte address from the host system with the traditional 3-byte address commands.
The 4-byte address mode for traditional commands is activated by setting the External Address (EXTADD) bit in the bank address
register to 1.
The Quad I/O commands provide a performance improvement option controlled by mode bits that are sent following the address bits.
The mode bits indicate whether the command following the end of the current read will be another read of the same type, without an
instruction at the beginning of the read. These mode bits give the option to eliminate the instruction cycles when doing a series of
Quad I/O read accesses.
A device ordering option provides an enhanced high performance option by adding a similar mode bit scheme to the DDR Fast Read,
Dual I/O, and Dual I/O DDR commands, in addition to the Quad I/O command.
Some commands require delay cycles following the address or mode bits to allow time to access the memory array. The delay cycles
are traditionally called dummy cycles. The dummy cycles are ignored by the memory thus any data provided by the host during these
cycles is “don’t care” and the host may also leave the SI signal at high impedance during the dummy cycles. When MIO commands
are used the host must stop driving the I/O signals (outputs are high impedance) before the end of last dummy cycle. When DDR
commands are used the host must not drive the I/O signals during any dummy cycle. The number of dummy cycles varies with the
SCK frequency or performance option selected via the Configuration Register 1 (CR1) Latency Code (LC). Dummy cycles are
measured from SCK falling edge to next SCK falling edge. SPI outputs are traditionally driven to a new value on the falling edge of
each SCK. Zero dummy cycles means the returning data is driven by the memory on the same falling edge of SCK that the host stops
driving address or mode bits.
The DDR commands may optionally have an 8-edge Data Learning Pattern (DLP) driven by the memory, on all data outputs, in the
dummy cycles immediately before the start of data. The DLP can help the host memory controller determine the phase shift from SCK
to data edges so that the memory controller can capture data at the center of the data eye.
When using SDR I/O commands at higher SCK frequencies (>50 MHz), an LC that provides 1 or more dummy cycles should be
selected to allow additional time for the host to stop driving before the memory starts driving data, to minimize I/O driver conflict. When
using DDR I/O commands with the DLP enabled, an LC that provides 5 or more dummy cycles should be selected to allow 1 cycle of
additional time for the host to stop driving before the memory starts driving the 4 cycle DLP.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 78 of 136
S25FL512S
Each read command ends when CS# is returned High at any point during data return. CS# must not be returned High during the mode
or dummy cycles before data returns as this may cause mode bits to be captured incorrectly; making it indeterminate as to whether
the device remains in enhanced high performance read mode.
9.4.1
Read (Read 03h or 4READ 13h)
The instruction
■
03h (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or
■
03h (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or
■
13h is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)
Then the memory contents, at the address given, are shifted out on SO. The maximum operating clock frequency for the READ
command is 50 MHz.
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the next higher address
in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore be read out with one single read instruction
and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached, the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h,
allowing the read sequence to be continued indefinitely.
Figure 70. Read Command Sequence (READ 03h or 13h)
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4 3
2
1 0 A
1 0
SO
7
Phase
9.4.2
Instruction
6 5
Address
4
3 2
1
0
7 6
5
Data 1
4
3
2 1 0
Data N
Fast Read (FAST_READ 0Bh or 4FAST_READ 0Ch)
The instruction
■
0Bh (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or
■
0Bh (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or
■
0Ch is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)
The address is followed by zero or eight dummy cycles depending on the latency code set in the Configuration Register. The dummy
cycles allow the device internal circuits additional time for accessing the initial address location. During the dummy cycles the data
value on SO is “don’t care” and may be high impedance. Then the memory contents, at the address given, are shifted out on SO.
The maximum operating clock frequency for FAST READ command is 133 MHz.
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the next higher address
in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore be read out with one single read instruction
and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached, the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h,
allowing the read sequence to be continued indefinitely.
Figure 71. Fast Read (FAST_READ 0Bh or 0Ch) Command Sequence with Read Latency
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4 3
2
1 0 A
1 0
SO
7 6
Phase
Instruction
Address
5
Dummy Cycles
4 3
2 1 0
Data 1
Figure 72. Fast Read Command (FAST_READ 0Bh or 0Ch) Sequence without Read Latency
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4 3
2
1 0 A
1 0
SO
Phase
7
Instruction
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Address
6 5
4
3 2
Data 1
1
0
7 6
5
4
3
2 1 0
Data N
Page 79 of 136
S25FL512S
9.4.3
Dual Output Read (DOR 3Bh or 4DOR 3Ch)
The instruction
■
3Bh (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or
■
3Bh (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or
■
3Ch is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)
Then the memory contents, at the address given, is shifted out two bits at a time through I/O0 (SI) and I/O1 (SO). Two bits are shifted
out at the SCK frequency by the falling edge of the SCK signal.
The maximum operating clock frequency for the Dual Output Read command is 104 MHz. For Dual Output Read commands, there
are zero or eight dummy cycles required after the last address bit is shifted into SI before data begins shifting out of I/O0 and I/O1.
This latency period (i.e., dummy cycles) allows the device’s internal circuitry enough time to read from the initial address. During the
dummy cycles, the data value on SI is a “don’t care” and may be high impedance. The number of dummy cycles is determined by the
frequency of SCK (refer to Table 22 on page 50).
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the next higher address
in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore be read out with one single read instruction
and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached, the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h,
allowing the read sequence to be continued indefinitely.
Figure 73. Dual Output Read Command Sequence (3-Byte Address, 3Bh [ExtAdd=0], LC=10b)
CS#
SCK
IO0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0
23 22 21
6 4 2 0 6 4 2 0
IO1
7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1
Phase
Instruction
Address
8 Dummy Cycles
Data 1
Data 2
Figure 74. Dual Output Read Command Sequence (4-Byte Address, 3Ch or 3Bh [ExtAdd=1, LC=10b])
CS#
SCK
IO0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
31 30 29
0
6 4 2 0 6 4 2 0
IO1
7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1
Phase
Instruction
Address 8 Dummy Cycles
Data 1
Data 2
Figure 75. Dual Output Read Command Sequence (4-Byte Address, 3Ch or 3Bh [ExtAdd=1, LC=11b])
CS#
SCK
IO0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
IO1
Phase
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
31 30 29
0 6 4 2 0 6 4 2 0
7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1
Instruction
Address Data 1
Data 2
Page 80 of 136
S25FL512S
9.4.4
Quad Output Read (QOR 6Bh or 4QOR 6Ch)
The instruction
■
6Bh (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or
■
6Bh (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or
■
6Ch is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)
Then the memory contents, at the address given, is shifted out four bits at a time through I/O0-I/O3. Each nibble (4 bits) is shifted out
at the SCK frequency by the falling edge of the SCK signal.
The maximum operating clock frequency for Quad Output Read command is 104 MHz. For Quad Output Read Mode, there may be
dummy cycles required after the last address bit is shifted into SI before data begins shifting out of I/O0-I/O3. This latency period (i.e.,
dummy cycles) allows the device’s internal circuitry enough time to set up for the initial address. During the dummy cycles, the data
value on I/O0-I/O3 is a “don’t care” and may be high impedance. The number of dummy cycles is determined by the frequency of SCK
(refer to Table 22 on page 50).
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the next higher address
in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore be read out with one single read instruction
and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached, the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h,
allowing the read sequence to be continued indefinitely.
The QUAD bit of Configuration Register must be set (CR Bit1=1) to enable the Quad mode capability.
Figure 76. Quad Output Read (QOR 6Bh or 4QOR 6Ch) Command Sequence with Read Latency
CS#
SCK
IO0
76543210A
10
40404040404
IO1
51515151515
IO2
62626262626
IO3
73737373737
Phase
Instruction
Address
Dummy
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5
Figure 77. Quad Output Read (QOR 6Bh or 4QOR 6Ch) Command Sequence without Read Latency
CS#
SCK
IO0
4
0
4
0
4
0
4
0
4
0
4
IO1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
A
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
IO2
6
2
6
2
6
2
6
2
6
2
6
7 3
Data 5
...
IO3
Phase
Instruction
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Address
0
7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3
Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4
7
Page 81 of 136
S25FL512S
9.4.5
Dual I/O Read (DIOR BBh or 4DIOR BCh)
The instruction
■
BBh (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or
■
BBh (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or
■
BCh is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)
The Dual I/O Read commands improve throughput with two I/O signals — I/O0 (SI) and I/O1 (SO). It is similar to the Dual Output
Read command but takes input of the address two bits per SCK rising edge. In some applications, the reduced address input time
might allow for code execution in place (XIP) i.e. directly from the memory device.
The maximum operating clock frequency for Dual I/O Read is 104 MHz.
For the Dual I/O Read command, there is a latency required after the last address bits are shifted into SI and SO before data begins
shifting out of I/O0 and I/O1. There are different ordering part numbers that select the latency code table used for this command, either
the High Performance LC (HPLC) table or the Enhanced High Performance LC (EHPLC) table. The HPLC table does not provide
cycles for mode bits so each Dual I/O Read command starts with the 8 bit instruction, followed by address, followed by a latency period.
This latency period (dummy cycles) allows the device internal circuitry enough time to access data at the initial address. During the
dummy cycles, the data value on SI and SO are “don’t care” and may be high impedance. The number of dummy cycles is determined
by the frequency of SCK (Table 22 on page 50). The number of dummy cycles is set by the LC bits in the Configuration Register (CR1).
The EHPLC table does provide cycles for mode bits so a series of Dual I/O Read commands may eliminate the 8-bit instruction after
the first Dual I/O Read command sends a mode bit pattern of Axh that indicates the following command will also be a Dual I/O Read
command. The first Dual I/O Read command in a series starts with the 8-bit instruction, followed by address, followed by four cycles
of mode bits, followed by a latency period. If the mode bit pattern is Axh the next command is assumed to be an additional Dual I/O
Read command that does not provide instruction bits. That command starts with address, followed by mode bits, followed by latency.
The Enhanced High Performance feature removes the need for the instruction sequence and greatly improves code execution (XIP).
The upper nibble (bits 7-4) of the Mode bits control the length of the next Dual I/O Read command through the inclusion or exclusion
of the first byte instruction code. The lower nibble (bits 3-0) of the Mode bits are “don’t care” (“x”) and may be high impedance. If the
Mode bits equal Axh, then the device remains in Dual I/O Enhanced High Performance Read Mode and the next address can be
entered (after CS# is raised high and then asserted low) without the BBh or BCh instruction, as shown in Figure 81; thus, eliminating
eight cycles for the command sequence. The following sequences will release the device from Dual I/O Enhanced High Performance
Read mode; after which, the device can accept standard SPI commands:
1. During the Dual I/O Enhanced High Performance Command Sequence, if the Mode bits are any value other than Axh, then the
next time CS# is raised high the device will be released from Dual I/O Read Enhanced High Performance Read mode.
During any operation, if CS# toggles high to low to high for eight cycles (or less) and data input (I/O0 and I/O1) are not set for a valid
instruction sequence, then the device will be released from Dual I/O Enhanced High Performance Read mode. Note that the four
mode bit cycles are part of the device’s internal circuitry latency time to access the initial address after the last address cycle that is
clocked into I/O0 (SI) and I/O1 (SO).
It is important that the I/O signals be set to high-impedance at or before the falling edge of the first data out clock. At higher clock
speeds the time available to turn off the host outputs before the memory device begins to drive (bus turn around) is diminished. It is
allowed and may be helpful in preventing I/O signal contention, for the host system to turn off the I/O signal outputs (make them high
impedance) during the last two “don’t care” mode cycles or during any dummy cycles.
Following the latency period the memory content, at the address given, is shifted out two bits at a time through I/O0 (SI) and I/O1
(SO). Two bits are shifted out at the SCK frequency at the falling edge of SCK signal.
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the next higher address
in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore be read out with one single read instruction
and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached, the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h,
allowing the read sequence to be continued indefinitely.
CS# should not be driven high during mode or dummy bits as this may make the mode bits indeterminate.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 82 of 136
S25FL512S
Figure 78. Dual I/O Read Command Sequence (3-Byte Address, BBh [ExtAdd=0], HPLC=00b)
CS#
SCK
IO0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
IO1
Phase
Instruction
22 20 18
0
6 4 2 0 6 4 2 0
23 21 19
1
7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1
4 Dummy
Address
Data 1
Data 2
Figure 79. Dual I/O Read Command Sequence (4-Byte Address, BBh [ExtAdd=1], HPLC=10b)
CS#
SCK
IO0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
IO1
Phase
30 28 26
0
6 4 2 0 6 4 2 0
31 29 27
1
7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1
Instruction
Address
6 Dummy
Data 1
Data 2
Figure 80. Dual I/O Read Command Sequence (4-Byte Address, BCh or BBh [ExtAdd=1], EHPLC=10b)
CS#
SCK
IO0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
IO1
Instruction
Phase
0 30
0
6
31
3 1
Address
2
7
4
2
0
6
5 3
Mode
1
7
Dum
4
0
6
5 3 1
Data 1
2
7
4
2
0
5 3 1
Data 2
Figure 81. Continuous Dual I/O Read Command Sequence (4-Byte Address, BCh or BBh [ExtAdd=1], EHPLC=10b)
CS#
SCK
IO0
6
IO1
7
Phase
4
2
0
30
5 3
Data N
1
31
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
2
0
6
4
2
0
6
3 1
Address
7
5 3
Mode
1
7
Dum
4
2
0
6
5 3
Data 1
1
7
4
2
0
5 3
Data 2
1
Page 83 of 136
S25FL512S
9.4.6
Quad I/O Read (QIOR EBh or 4QIOR ECh)
The instruction
■
EBh (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or
■
EBh (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or
■
ECh is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)
The Quad I/O Read command improves throughput with four I/O signals — I/O0-I/O3. It is similar to the Quad Output Read command
but allows input of the address bits four bits per serial SCK clock. In some applications, the reduced instruction overhead might allow
for code execution (XIP) directly from the S25FL512S device. The QUAD bit of the Configuration Register must be set (CR Bit1=1)
to enable the Quad capability of the S25FL512S device.
The maximum operating clock frequency for Quad I/O Read is 104 MHz.
For the Quad I/O Read command, there is a latency required after the mode bits (described below) before data begins shifting out of
I/O0-I/O3. This latency period (i.e., dummy cycles) allows the device’s internal circuitry enough time to access data at the initial
address. During latency cycles, the data value on I/O0-I/O3 are “don’t care” and may be high impedance. The number of dummy
cycles is determined by the frequency of SCK and the latency code table (refer to Table 22 on page 50). There are different ordering
part numbers that select the latency code table used for this command, either the High Performance LC (HPLC) table or the Enhanced
High Performance LC (EHPLC) table. The number of dummy cycles is set by the LC bits in the Configuration Register (CR1). However,
both latency code tables use the same latency values for the Quad I/O Read command.
Following the latency period, the memory contents at the address given, is shifted out four bits at a time through I/O0-I/O3. Each nibble
(4 bits) is shifted out at the SCK frequency by the falling edge of the SCK signal.
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the next higher address
in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore be read out with one single read instruction
and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached, the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h,
allowing the read sequence to be continued indefinitely.
Address jumps can be done without the need for additional Quad I/O Read instructions. This is controlled through the setting of the
Mode bits (after the address sequence, as shown in Figure 82 on page 85 or Figure 84 on page 85). This added feature removes the
need for the instruction sequence and greatly improves code execution (XIP). The upper nibble (bits 7-4) of the Mode bits control the
length of the next Quad I/O instruction through the inclusion or exclusion of the first byte instruction code. The lower nibble (bits 3-0)
of the Mode bits are “don’t care” (“x”). If the Mode bits equal Axh, then the device remains in Quad I/O High Performance Read Mode
and the next address can be entered (after CS# is raised high and then asserted low) without requiring the EBh or ECh instruction,
as shown in Figure 83 on page 85 or Figure 85 on page 85; thus, eliminating eight cycles for the command sequence. The following
sequences will release the device from Quad I/O High Performance Read mode; after which, the device can accept standard SPI
commands:
1. During the Quad I/O Read Command Sequence, if the Mode bits are any value other than Axh, then the next time CS# is raised
high the device will be released from Quad I/O High Performance Read mode.
During any operation, if CS# toggles high to low to high for eight cycles (or less) and data input (I/O0-I/O3) are not set for a valid
instruction sequence, then the device will be released from Quad I/O High Performance Read mode. Note that the two mode bit clock
cycles and additional wait states (i.e., dummy cycles) allow the device’s internal circuitry latency time to access the initial address
after the last address cycle that is clocked into I/O0-I/O3.
It is important that the I/O0-I/O3 signals be set to high-impedance at or before the falling edge of the first data out clock. At higher
clock speeds the time available to turn off the host outputs before the memory device begins to drive (bus turn around) is diminished.
It is allowed and may be helpful in preventing I/O0-I/O3 signal contention, for the host system to turn off the I/O0-I/O3 signal outputs
(make them high impedance) during the last “don’t care” mode cycle or during any dummy cycles.
CS# should not be driven high during mode or dummy bits as this may make the mode bits indeterminate.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 84 of 136
S25FL512S
Figure 82. Quad I/O Read Command Sequence (3-Byte Address, EBh [ExtAdd=0], LC=00b)
CS#
SCK
IO0
7
6
5
0 20
4
0
4
0
4
0
4
0
4
0
4
0
IO1
21
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
IO2
22
6
2
6
2
6
2
6
2
6
2
6
2
IO3
23
7
3
7
3
7
3
7
3
7
3
7
3
Phase
4
3
2
1
Instruction
Address
Mode
Dummy
D1
D2
D3
D4
Figure 83. Continuous Quad I/O Read Command Sequence (3-Byte Address), LC=00b
CS#
SCK
IO0
4
0
4
0
20
4
0
4
0
4
0
4
0
6
4
2
0
IO1
5
1
5
1
21
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
7
5
3
1
IO2
6
2
6
2
22
6
2
6
2
6
2
6
1
7
5
3
1
IO3
7 3
DN-1
7 3
DN
23
3
7 3
Mode
7
3
7
1
D2
7
5
3
Phase
7
Address
Dummy
D1
D3
1
D4
Figure 84. Quad I/O Read Command Sequence(4-Byte Address, ECh or EBh [ExtAdd=1], LC=00b)
CS#
SCK
IO0
0 28
4
0
4
0
4
0
4
0
4
0
4
0
IO1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
29
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
IO2
30
6
2
6
2
6
2
6
2
6
2
6
2
IO3
31
7 3 7 3
Address
Mode
7
3
D1
7
3
D2
7
3
D3
Instruction
Phase
Dummy
7 3
D4
Figure 85. Continuous Quad I/O Read Command Sequence (4-Byte Address), LC=00b
CS#
SCK
IO0
4
0
4
0
28
4
0
4
0
4
0
4
0
6
4
2
0
IO1
5
1
5
1
29
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
7
5
3
1
IO2
6
2
6
2
30
6
2
6
2
6
2
6
1
7
5
3
1
IO3
7 3
DN-1
7 3
DN
31
3
7 3
Mode
7
3
7
1
7
5
3
Phase
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
7
Address
Dummy
D1
D2
D3
1
D4
Page 85 of 136
S25FL512S
9.4.7
DDR Fast Read (DDRFR 0Dh, 4DDRFR 0Eh)
The instruction
■
0Dh (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or
■
0Dh (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or
■
0Eh is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)
The DDR Fast Read command improves throughput by transferring address and data on both the falling and rising edge of SCK. It
is similar to the Fast Read command but allows transfer of address and data on every edge of the clock.
The maximum operating clock frequency for DDR Fast Read command is 80 MHz.
For the DDR Fast Read command, there is a latency required after the last address bits are shifted into SI before data begins shifting
out of SO. There are different ordering part numbers that select the latency code table used for this command, either the High
Performance LC (HPLC) table or the Enhanced High Performance LC (EHPLC) table. The HPLC table does not provide cycles for
mode bits so each DDR Fast Read command starts with the 8-bit instruction, followed by address, followed by a latency period.
This latency period (dummy cycles) allows the device internal circuitry enough time to access data at the initial address. During the
dummy cycles, the data value on SI is “don’t care” and may be high impedance. The number of dummy cycles is determined by the
frequency of SCK (see Table 22 on page 50). The number of dummy cycles is set by the LC bits in the Configuration Register (CR1).
Then the memory contents, at the address given, is shifted out, in DDR fashion, one bit at a time on each clock edge through SO.
Each bit is shifted out at the SCK frequency by the rising and falling edge of the SCK signal.
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the next higher address
in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore be read out with one single read instruction
and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached, the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h,
allowing the read sequence to be continued indefinitely.
The EHPLC table does provide cycles for mode bits so a series of DDR Fast Read commands may eliminate the 8-bit instruction after
the first DDR Fast Read command sends a mode bit pattern of complementary first and second Nibbles, e.g. A5h, 5Ah, 0Fh, etc., that
indicates the following command will also be a DDR Fast Read command. The first DDR Fast Read command in a series starts with
the 8-bit instruction, followed by address, followed by four cycles of mode bits, followed by a latency period. If the mode bit pattern is
complementary the next command is assumed to be an additional DDR Fast Read command that does not provide instruction bits.
That command starts with address, followed by mode bits, followed by latency.
When the EHPLC table is used, address jumps can be done without the need for additional DDR Fast Read instructions. This is
controlled through the setting of the Mode bits (after the address sequence, as shown in Figure 86 on page 87 and Figure 88
on page 87. This added feature removes the need for the eight bit SDR instruction sequence to reduce initial access time (improves
XIP performance). The Mode bits control the length of the next DDR Fast Read operation through the inclusion or exclusion of the
first byte instruction code. If the upper nibble (I/O[7:4]) and lower nibble (I/O[3:0]) of the Mode bits are complementary (i.e. 5h and Ah)
then the next address can be entered (after CS# is raised high and then asserted low) without requiring the 0Dh or 0Eh instruction,
as shown in Figure 87 and Figure 89, thus, eliminating eight cycles from the command sequence. The following sequences will release
the device from this continuous DDR Fast Read mode; after which, the device can accept standard SPI commands:
1. During the DDR Fast Read Command Sequence, if the Mode bits are not complementary the next time CS# is raised high the
device will be released from the continuous DDR Fast Read mode.
2. During any operation, if CS# toggles high to low to high for eight cycles (or less) and data input (SI) are not set for a valid instruction
sequence, then the device will be released from DDR Fast Read mode.
CS# should not be driven high during mode or dummy bits as this may make the mode bits indeterminate.
The HOLD function is not valid during any part of a Fast DDR Command.
Although the data learning pattern (DLP) is programmable, the following example shows example of the DLP of 34h. The DLP 34h
(or 00110100) will be driven on each of the active outputs (i.e. all four I/Os on a x4 device, both I/Os on a x2 device and the single
SO output on a x1 device). This pattern was chosen to cover both DC and AC data transition scenarios. The two DC transition
scenarios include data low for a long period of time (two half clocks) followed by a high going transition (001) and the complementary
low going transition (110). The two AC transition scenarios include data low for a short period of time (one half clock) followed by a
high going transition (101) and the complementary low going transition (010). The DC transitions will typically occur with a starting
point closer to the supply rail than the AC transitions that may not have fully settled to their steady state (DC) levels. In many cases
the DC transitions will bound the beginning of the data valid period and the AC transitions will bound the ending of the data valid
period. These transitions will allow the host controller to identify the beginning and ending of the valid data eye. Once the data eye
has been characterized the optimal data capture point can be chosen. See Section 7.6.12 SPI DDR Data Learning Registers
on page 55 for more details.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 86 of 136
S25FL512S
Figure 86. DDR Fast Read Initial Access (3-Byte Address, 0Dh [ExtAdd=0, EHPLC=11b])
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
2322
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SO
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Phase
Instruction
Address
Mode
Dummy
Data 1
Data 2
Figure 87. Continuous DDR Fast Read Subsequent Access (3-Byte Address [ExtAdd=0, EHPLC=11b])
CS#
SCK
IO0
23
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IO1
7
Phase
Address
Mode
6
5
4
Dum
3
2
1
0
7
Data 1
6
D2
Figure 88. DDR Fast Read Initial Access (4-Byte Address, 0Eh or 0Dh [ExtAdd=1], EHPLC=01b)[47]
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
31
SO
76 54 3 2 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6
Phase
Instruction
Address
Mode
DLP
Data 1
D2
Figure 89. Continuous DDR Fast Read Subsequent Access (4-Byte Address [ExtAdd=1], EHPLC=01b)[47]
CS#
SCK
SI
SO
Phase
31
1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6
Address
Mode
5 4
3 2 1 0
DLP
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6
Data 1
D2
Figure 90. DDR Fast Read Subsequent Access (4-Byte Address, HPLC=01b)
CS#
SCK
SI
SO
Phase
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
3.
1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6
Instruction
Address
Dummy
Data 1
D2
Note
47. Example DLP of 34h (or 00110100).
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 87 of 136
S25FL512S
9.4.8
DDR Dual I/O Read (BDh, BEh)
The instruction
■
BDh (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or
■
BDh (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or
■
BEh is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)
Then the memory contents, at the address given, is shifted out, in a DDR fashion, two bits at a time on each clock edge through I/O0
(SI) and I/O1 (SO). Two bits are shifted out at the SCK frequency by the rising and falling edge of the SCK signal.
The DDR Dual I/O Read command improves throughput with two I/O signals — I/O0 (SI) and I/O1 (SO). It is similar to the Dual I/O
Read command but transfers two address, mode, or data bits on every edge of the clock. In some applications, the reduced instruction
overhead might allow for code execution (XIP) directly from the S25FL512S device.
The maximum operating clock frequency for DDR Dual I/O Read command is 80 MHz.
For DDR Dual I/O Read commands, there is a latency required after the last address bits are shifted into I/O0 and I/O1, before data
begins shifting out of I/O0 and I/O1. There are different ordering part numbers that select the latency code table used for this command,
either the High Performance LC (HPLC) table or the Enhanced High Performance LC (EHPLC) table. The number of latency (dummy)
clocks is determined by the frequency of SCK (refer to Table 21 on page 50 or Table 23 on page 51). The number of dummy cycles
is set by the LC bits in the Configuration Register (CR1).
The HPLC table does not provide cycles for mode bits so each Dual I/O command starts with the 8 bit instruction, followed by address,
followed by a latency period. This latency period allows the device’s internal circuitry enough time to access the initial address. During
these latency cycles, the data value on SI (I/O0) and SO (I/O1) are “don’t care” and may be high impedance. When the Data Learning
Pattern (DLP) is enabled the host system must not drive the I/O signals during the dummy cycles. The I/O signals must be left high
impedance by the host so that the memory device can drive the DLP during the dummy cycles.
The EHPLC table does provide cycles for mode bits so a series of Dual I/O DDR commands may eliminate the 8 bit instruction after
the first command sends a complementary mode bit pattern, as shown in Figure 91 and Figure 93 on page 89. This added feature
removes the need for the eight bit SDR instruction sequence and dramatically reduces initial access times (improves XIP performance). The Mode bits control the length of the next DDR Dual I/O Read operation through the inclusion or exclusion of the first byte
instruction code. If the upper nibble (I/O[7:4]) and lower nibble (I/O[3:0]) of the Mode bits are complementary (i.e. 5h and Ah) the
device transitions to Continuous DDR Dual I/O Read Mode and the next address can be entered (after CS# is raised high and then
asserted low) without requiring the BDh or BEh instruction, as shown in Figure 92 on page 89, and thus, eliminating eight cycles from
the command sequence. The following sequences will release the device from Continuous DDR Dual I/O Read mode; after which,
the device can accept standard SPI commands:
1. During the DDR Dual I/O Read Command Sequence, if the Mode bits are not complementary the next time CS# is raised high and
then asserted low the device will be released from DDR Dual I/O Read mode.
2. During any operation, if CS# toggles high to low to high for eight cycles (or less) and data input (I/O0 and I/O1) are not set for a
valid instruction sequence, then the device will be released from DDR Dual I/O Read mode.
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the next higher address
in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore be read out with one single read instruction
and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached, the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h,
allowing the read sequence to be continued indefinitely.
CS# should not be driven high during mode or dummy bits as this may make the mode bits indeterminate. The HOLD function is not
valid during Dual I/O DDR commands.
Note that the memory devices may drive the I/Os with a preamble prior to the first data value. The preamble is a data learning pattern
(DLP) that is used by the host controller to optimize data capture at higher frequencies. The preamble DLP drives the I/O bus for the
four clock cycles immediately before data is output. The host must be sure to stop driving the I/O bus prior to the time that the memory
starts outputting the preamble.
The preamble is intended to give the host controller an indication about the round trip time from when the host drives a clock edge to
when the corresponding data value returns from the memory device. The host controller will skew the data capture point during the
preamble period to optimize timing margins and then use the same skew time to capture the data during the rest of the read operation.
The optimized capture point will be determined during the preamble period of every read operation. This optimization strategy is
intended to compensate for both the PVT (process, voltage, temperature) of both the memory device and the host controller as well
as any system level delays caused by flight time on the PCB.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 88 of 136
S25FL512S
Although the data learning pattern (DLP) is programmable, the following example shows example of the DLP of 34h. The DLP 34h
(or 00110100) will be driven on each of the active outputs (i.e. all four SIOs on a x4 device, both SIOs on a x2 device and the single
SO output on a x1 device). This pattern was chosen to cover both DC and AC data transition scenarios. The two DC transition
scenarios include data low for a long period of time (two half clocks) followed by a high going transition (001) and the complementary
low going transition (110). The two AC transition scenarios include data low for a short period of time (one half clock) followed by a
high going transition (101) and the complementary low going transition (010). The DC transitions will typically occur with a starting
point closer to the supply rail than the AC transitions that may not have fully settled to their steady state (DC) levels. In many cases
the DC transitions will bound the beginning of the data valid period and the AC transitions will bound the ending of the data valid
period. These transitions will allow the host controller to identify the beginning and ending of the valid data eye. Once the data eye
has been characterized the optimal data capture point can be chosen. See Section 7.6.12 SPI DDR Data Learning Registers
on page 55 for more details.
Figure 91. DDR Dual I/O Read Initial Access (4-Byte Address, BEh or BDh [ExtAdd=1], EHPLC= 01b)
CS#
SCK
IO0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IO1
Phase
Instruction
30 28
0
6
4
2
0
7 6
5 4
3
2
1 0
6
4
2
0
6
31 29
1
7
5
3
1
7 6
5 4
3
2
1 0
7
5
3
1
7
Address
Mode
Dum
DLP
Data 1
Figure 92. Continuous DDR Dual I/O Read Subsequent Access (4-Byte Address, EHPLC= 01b)
CS#
SCK
IO0
IO1
Phase
30
2
0
6
4
2
0
7
6
4
5
3
2 1
0
6
4
2
0
6
31
3
1
7
5
3
1
7
6
4
5
3
2 1
0
7
5
3
1
7
Address
Mode
DLP
Dummy
Data 1
D2
Figure 93. DDR Dual I/O Read (4-Byte Address, BEh or BDh [ExtAdd=1], HPLC=00b)
CS#
SCK
IO0
IO1
Phase
7
6
5
4
3
Instruction
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
2
1
0
30
2 0
31
3 1
Address
6 4 2 0 6
7 5 3 1 7
Dummy
Data 1
D2
Page 89 of 136
S25FL512S
9.4.9
DDR Quad I/O Read (EDh, EEh)
The Read DDR Quad I/O command improves throughput with four I/O signals - I/O0-I/O3. It is similar to the Quad I/O Read command
but allows input of the address four bits on every edge of the clock. In some applications, the reduced instruction overhead might allow
for code execution (XIP) directly from the S25FL512S device. The QUAD bit of the Configuration Register must be set (CR Bit1=1)
to enable the Quad capability.
The instruction
■
EDh (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or
■
EDh (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or
■
EEh is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)
The address is followed by mode bits. Then the memory contents, at the address given, is shifted out, in a DDR fashion, with four bits
at a time on each clock edge through I/O0-I/O3.
The maximum operating clock frequency for Read DDR Quad I/O command is 80 MHz.
For Read DDR Quad I/O, there is a latency required after the last address and mode bits are shifted into the I/O0-I/O3 signals before
data begins shifting out of I/O0-I/O3. This latency period (dummy cycles) allows the device’s internal circuitry enough time to access
the initial address. During these latency cycles, the data value on I/O0-I/O3 are “don’t care” and may be high impedance. When the
Data Learning Pattern (DLP) is enabled the host system must not drive the I/O signals during the dummy cycles. The I/O signals must
be left high impedance by the host so that the memory device can drive the DLP during the dummy cycles.
There are different ordering part numbers that select the latency code table used for this command, either the High Performance LC
(HPLC) table or the Enhanced High Performance LC (EHPLC) table. The number of dummy cycles is determined by the frequency
of SCK (refer to Table 21 on page 50). The number of dummy cycles is set by the LC bits in the Configuration Register (CR1).
Both latency tables provide cycles for mode bits so a series of Quad I/O DDR commands may eliminate the 8 bit instruction after the
first command sends a complementary mode bit pattern, as shown in Figure 94 and Figure 96. This feature removes the need for the
eight bit SDR instruction sequence and dramatically reduces initial access times (improves XIP performance). The Mode bits control
the length of the next Read DDR Quad I/O operation through the inclusion or exclusion of the first byte instruction code. If the upper
nibble (I/O[7:4]) and lower nibble (I/O[3:0]) of the Mode bits are complementary (i.e. 5h and Ah) the device transitions to Continuous
Read DDR Quad I/O Mode and the next address can be entered (after CS# is raised high and then asserted low) without requiring
the EDh or EEh instruction, as shown in Figure 95 on page 91 and Figure 97 on page 91 thus, eliminating eight cycles from the
command sequence. The following sequences will release the device from Continuous Read DDR Quad I/O mode; after which, the
device can accept standard SPI commands:
1. During the Read DDR Quad I/O Command Sequence, if the Mode bits are not complementary the next time CS# is raised high
and then asserted low the device will be released from Read DDR Quad I/O mode.
2. During any operation, if CS# toggles high to low to high for eight cycles (or less) and data input (I/O0, I/O1, I/O2, and I/O3) are not
set for a valid instruction sequence, then the device will be released from Read DDR Quad I/O mode.
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the next higher address
in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore be read out with one single read instruction
and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached, the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h,
allowing the read sequence to be continued indefinitely.
CS# should not be driven high during mode or dummy bits as this may make the mode bits indeterminate. The HOLD function is not
valid during Quad I/O DDR commands.
Note that the memory devices drive the I/Os with a preamble prior to the first data value. The preamble is a pattern that is used by
the host controller to optimize data capture at higher frequencies. The preamble drives the I/O bus for the four clock cycles immediately
before data is output. The host must be sure to stop driving the I/O bus prior to the time that the memory starts outputting the preamble.
The preamble is intended to give the host controller an indication about the round trip time from when the host drives a clock edge to
when the corresponding data value returns from the memory device. The host controller will skew the data capture point during the
preamble period to optimize timing margins and then use the same skew time to capture the data during the rest of the read operation.
The optimized capture point will be determined during the preamble period of every read operation. This optimization strategy is
intended to compensate for both the PVT (process, voltage, temperature) of both the memory device and the host controller as well
as any system level delays caused by flight time on the PCB.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 90 of 136
S25FL512S
Although the data learning pattern (DLP) is programmable, the following example shows example of the DLP of 34h. The DLP 34h
(or 00110100) will be driven on each of the active outputs (i.e. all four SIOs on a x4 device, both SIOs on a x2 device and the single
SO output on a x1 device). This pattern was chosen to cover both DC and AC data transition scenarios. The two DC transition
scenarios include data low for a long period of time (two half clocks) followed by a high going transition (001) and the complementary
low going transition (110). The two AC transition scenarios include data low for a short period of time (one half clock) followed by a
high going transition (101) and the complementary low going transition (010). The DC transitions will typically occur with a starting
point closer to the supply rail than the AC transitions that may not have fully settled to their steady state (DC) levels. In many cases
the DC transitions will bound the beginning of the data valid period and the AC transitions will bound the ending of the data valid
period. These transitions will allow the host controller to identify the beginning and ending of the valid data eye. Once the data eye
has been characterized the optimal data capture point can be chosen. See SPI DDR Data Learning Registers on page 55 for more
details.
Figure 94. DDR Quad I/O Read Initial Access (3-Byte Address, EDh [ExtAdd=0], HPLC=11b)
CS#
SCK
IO0
20 16 12 8 4
0 4 0
7 6
5 4 3
2 1 0
4 0 4 0
IO1
7
6
5
21 17 13 9 5
1 5 1
7 6
5 4 3
2 1 0
5 1 5 1
IO2
22 18 14 10 6
2 6 2
7 6
5 4 3
2 1 0
6 2 6 2
IO3
23 19 15 11 7
3 7 3
7 6
5 4 3
2 1 0
7 3 7 3
Phase
4
3
2
1
0
Instruction
Address
Mode
Dummy
DLP
D1
D2
Figure 95. Continuous DDR Quad I/O Read Subsequent Access (3-Byte Address,HPLC=11b)
CS#
SCK
IO0
IO1
IO2
IO3
Phase
20 16 12 8
4
0
4
0
4
0
4
0
4
0
4
0
4
0
21 17 13 9
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
22 18 14 10 6
2
6
2
6
2
6
2
6
2
6
2
6
2
23 19 15 11 7
3
7
3
7
3
7
3
7
3
7
3
7
3
Address
Mode
Dummy
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
Figure 96. DDR Quad I/O Read Initial Access (4-Byte Address, EEh or EDh [ExtAdd=1], EHPLC=01b)[48]
CS#
SCK
IO0
IO1
IO2
IO3
Phase
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Instruction
2. 2. 2. 1. 1.
8 4 0 4 0
7 6 5 4 3 21 0 4 0 4 0
2. 2. 2. 1. 1.
9 5 1 5 1
7 6 5 4 3 21 0 5 1 5 1
3. 2. 2. 1. 1. 1.
6 2 6 2
7 6 5 4 3 21 0 6 2 6 2
3. 2. 2. 1. 1. 1.
7 3 7 3
Address
Mod .
7 6 5 4 3 21 0 7 3 7 3
Dummy
DLP
D1 D2
Figure 97. Continuous DDR Quad I/O Read Subsequent Access (4-Byte Address, EHPLC=01b)[48]
CS#
SCK
IO0
IO1
IO2
IO3
Phase
28 24 20 16 12 8 4
0 4
0
7 6
5 4
3
2 1 0
4
0 4
0 4
29 25 21 17 13 9 5
1 5
1
7 6
5 4
3
2 1 0
5
1 5
1 5
30 26 22 18 14 10 6
2 6
2
7 6
5 4
3
2 1 0
6
2 6
2 6
31 27 23 19 15 11 7
3 7
3
7 6
5 4
3
2 1 0
7
3 7
3 7
Address
Mode
Dummy
DLP
D1
D2
Note
48. Example DLP of 34h (or 00110100).
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 91 of 136
S25FL512S
9.5 Program Flash Array Commands
9.5.1
Program Granularity
9.5.1.1
Automatic ECC
Each 16 byte aligned and 16 byte length Programming Block has an automatic Error Correction Code (ECC) value. The data block
plus ECC form an ECC unit. In combination with Error Detection and Correction (EDC) logic the ECC is used to detect and correct
any single bit error found during a read access. When data is first programmed within an ECC unit the ECC value is set for the entire
ECC unit. If the same ECC unit is programmed more than once the ECC value is changed to disable the EDC function. A sector erase
is needed to again enable Automatic ECC on that Programming Block. The 16 byte Program Block is the smallest program granularity
on which Automatic ECC is enabled.
These are automatic operations transparent to the user. The transparency of the Automatic ECC feature enhances data accuracy for
typical programming operations which write data once to each ECC unit but, facilitates software compatibility to previous generations
of FL family of products by allowing for single byte programming and bit walking in which the same ECC unit is programmed more
than once. When an ECC unit has Automatic ECC disabled, EDC is not done on data read from the ECC unit location.
An ECC status register is provided for determining if ECC is enabled on an ECC unit and whether any errors have been detected and
corrected in the ECC unit data or the ECC (See ECC Status Register (ECCSR) on page 53.) The ECC Status Register Read (ECCRD)
command is used to read the ECC status on any ECC unit.
Error Detection and Correction (EDC) is applied to all parts of the Flash address spaces other than registers. An Error Correction
Code (ECC) is calculated for each group of bytes protected and the ECC is stored in a hidden area related to the group of bytes. The
group of protected bytes and the related ECC are together called an ECC unit.
ECC is calculated for each 16 byte aligned and length ECC unit.
■
Single Bit EDC is supported with 8 ECC bits per ECC unit, plus 1 bit for an ECC disable Flag.
■
Sector erase resets all ECC bits and ECC disable flags in a sector to the default state (enabled).
■
ECC is programmed as part of the standard Program commands operation.
■
ECC is disabled automatically if multiple programming operations are done on the same ECC unit.
■
Single byte programming or bit walking is allowed but disables ECC on the second program to the same 16-byte ECC unit.
■
The ECC disable flag is programmed when ECC is disabled.
■
To re-enable ECC for an ECC unit that has been disabled, the Sector that includes the ECC unit must be erased.
■
To ensure the best data integrity provided by EDC, each ECC unit should be programmed only once so that ECC is stored for that
unit and not disabled.
■
The calculation, programming, and disabling of ECC is done automatically as part of a programming operation. The detection and
correction, if needed, is done automatically as part of read operations. The host system sees only corrected data from a read
operation.
■
ECC protects the OTP region - however a second program operation on the same ECC unit will disable ECC permanently on that
ECC unit (OTP is one time programmable, hence an erase operation to re-enable the ECC enable/indicator bit is prohibited).
9.5.1.2
Page Programming
Page Programming is done by loading a Page Buffer with data to be programmed and issuing a programming command to move data
from the buffer to the memory array. This sets an upper limit on the amount of data that can be programmed with a single programming
command. Page Programming allows up to a page size (512 bytes) to be programmed in one operation. The page is aligned on the
page size address boundary. It is possible to program from one bit up to a page size in each Page programming operation. It is
recommended that a multiple of 16 byte length and aligned Program Blocks be written. For the very best performance, programming
should be done in full pages of 512 bytes aligned on 512-byte boundaries with each Page being programmed only once.
9.5.1.3
Single Byte Programming
Single Byte Programming allows full backward compatibility to the standard SPI Page Programming (PP) command by allowing a
single byte to be programmed anywhere in the memory array. While single byte programming is supported, this will disable Automatic
ECC on the 16 byte ECC unit where the byte is located.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 92 of 136
S25FL512S
9.5.2
Page Program (PP 02h or 4PP 12h)
The Page Program (PP) commands allows bytes to be programmed in the memory (changing bits from 1 to 0). Before the Page
Program (PP) commands can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued and decoded by the
device. After the Write Enable (WREN) command has been decoded successfully, the device sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) in
the Status Register to enable any write operations.
The instruction
■
02h (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or
■
02h (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or
■
12h is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)
and at least one data byte on SI. Up to a page can be provided on SI after the 3-byte address with instruction 02h or 4-byte address
with instruction 12h has been provided. If the 9 least significant address bits (A8-A0) are not all zero, all transmitted data that goes
beyond the end of the current page are programmed from the start address of the same page (from the address whose 9 least
significant bits (A8-A0) are all zero) i.e. the address wraps within the page aligned address boundaries. This is a result of only requiring
the user to enter one single page address to cover the entire page boundary.
If less than a page of data is sent to the device, these data bytes will be programmed in sequence, starting at the provided address
within the page, without having any affect on the other bytes of the same page.
For optimized timings, using the Page Program (PP) command to load the entire page size program buffer within the page boundary
will save overall programming time versus loading less than a page size into the program buffer.
The programming process is managed by the flash memory device internal control logic. After a programming command is issued,
the programming operation status can be checked using the Read Status Register-1 command. The WIP bit (SR1[0]) will indicate
when the programming operation is completed. The P_ERR bit (SR1[6]) will indicate if an error occurs in the programming operation
that prevents successful completion of programming.
Figure 98. Page Program (PP 02h or 4PP 12h) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6 5
4 3
2
1 0
A
5
4 3
2 1
0
7 6
5 4
3 2
1
0 7
6 5
4
3 2
1 0
SO
Phase
9.5.3
Instruction
Address
Input Data 1
Input Data 2
Quad Page Program (QPP 32h or 38h, or 4QPP 34h)
The Quad-input Page Program (QPP) command allows bytes to be programmed in the memory (changing bits from 1 to 0). The
Quad-input Page Program (QPP) command allows up to a page size (512 bytes) of data to be loaded into the Page Buffer using four
signals: I/O0-I/O3. QPP can improve performance for PROM Programmer and applications that have slower clock speeds (< 12 MHz)
by loading 4 bits of data per clock cycle. Systems with faster clock speeds do not realize as much benefit for the QPP command since
the inherent page program time becomes greater than the time it takes to clock-in the data. The maximum frequency for the QPP
command is 80 MHz.
To use Quad Page Program the Quad Enable Bit in the Configuration Register must be set (QUAD=1). A Write Enable command
must be executed before the device will accept the QPP command (Status Register-1, WEL=1).
The instruction
■
32h (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or
■
32h (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or
■
38h (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or
■
38h (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or
■
34h is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)
and at least one data byte, into the I/O signals. Data must be programmed at the previously erased (FFh) memory locations.
Recommend the programming page is aligned on the page size address boundary. It is possible to program from one bit up to a page
size in each Page programming operation. It is recommended that a multiple of 16 byte length and aligned Program Blocks be written.
This insures that Automatic ECC is not disabled”.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 93 of 136
S25FL512S
All other functions of QPP are identical to Page Program. The QPP command sequence is shown in the figure below.
Figure 99. Quad 512-byte Page Program Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
IO0
4
0
4
0
4
0
4
0
4
0
4
IO1
7
6
5
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
IO2
6
2
6
2
6
2
6
2
6
2
6
IO3
7
3
7
3
7
3
7
3
7
3
7
Data 5
...
Phase
9.5.4
4
3
2
1
0
Instruction
A
1
0
Address
Data 1 Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Program Suspend (PGSP 85h) and Resume (PGRS 8Ah)
The Program Suspend command allows the system to interrupt a programming operation and then read from any other
non-erase-suspended sector or non-program-suspended-page. Program Suspend is valid only during a programming operation.
Commands allowed after the Program Suspend command is issued:
■
Read Status Register 1 (RDSR1 05h)
■
Read Status Register 2 (RDSR2 07h)
The Write in Progress (WIP) bit in Status Register 1 (SR1[0]) must be checked to know when the programming operation has stopped.
The Program Suspend Status bit in the Status Register-2 (SR2[0]) can be used to determine if a programming operation has been
suspended or was completed at the time WIP changes to 0. The time required for the suspend operation to complete is tPSL, see
Table 45 on page 104.
See Table 43 on page 97 for the commands allowed while programming is suspend.
The Program Resume command 8Ah must be written to resume the programming operation after a Program Suspend. If the
programming operation was completed during the suspend operation, a resume command is not needed and has no effect if issued.
Program Resume commands will be ignored unless a Program operation is suspended.
After a Program Resume command is issued, the WIP bit in the Status Register-1 will be set to a 1 and the programming operation
will resume. Program operations may be interrupted as often as necessary e.g. a program suspend command could immediately
follow a program resume command but, in order for a program operation to progress to completion there must be some periods of
time between resume and the next suspend command greater than or equal to tPRS. See Table 45 on page 104.
Figure 100. Program Suspend (PGSP 85h) Command Sequence
tPSL
CS#
SCK
SI
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SO
Phase
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Suspend Instruction
Status
Read Status Instruction
Phase
Instr. During Suspend
Repeat Status Read Until Suspended
Figure 101. 10.55 Program Resume (PGRS 8Ah) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Phase
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Instruction
Page 94 of 136
S25FL512S
9.6 Erase Flash Array Commands
9.6.1
Sector Erase (SE D8h or 4SE DCh)
The Sector Erase (SE) command sets all bits in the addressed sector to 1 (all bytes are FFh). Before the Sector Erase (SE) command
can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued and decoded by the device, which sets the Write
Enable Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.
The instruction
■
D8h [ExtAdd=0] is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0), or
■
D8h [ExtAdd=1] is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0), or
■
DCh is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)
CS# must be driven into the logic high state after the twenty-fourth or thirty-second bit of address has been latched in on SI. This will
initiate the erase cycle, which involves the pre-programming and erase of the chosen sector. If CS# is not driven high after the last bit
of address, the sector erase operation will not be executed.
As soon as CS# is driven into the logic high state, the internal erase cycle will be initiated. With the internal erase cycle in progress,
the user can read the value of the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit to check if the operation has been completed. The WIP bit will indicate
a 1 when the erase cycle is in progress and a0 when the erase cycle has been completed.
A Sector Erase (SE) command applied to a sector that has been Write Protected through the Block Protection bits or ASP, will not be
executed and will set the E_ERR status.
ASP has a PPB and a DYB protection bit for each sector.
Figure 102. Sector Erase (SE D8h or 4SE DCh) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
A
1
0
SO
Phase
9.6.2
Instruction
Address
Bulk Erase (BE 60h or C7h)
The Bulk Erase (BE) command sets all bits to 1 (all bytes are FFh) inside the entire flash memory array. Before the BE command can
be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued and decoded by the device, which sets the Write Enable
Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.
CS# must be driven into the logic high state after the eighth bit of the instruction byte has been latched in on SI. This will initiate the
erase cycle, which involves the pre-programming and erase of the entire flash memory array. If CS# is not driven high after the last
bit of instruction, the BE operation will not be executed.
As soon as CS# is driven into the logic high state, the erase cycle will be initiated. With the erase cycle in progress, the user can read
the value of the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit to determine when the operation has been completed. The WIP bit will indicate a 1 when
the erase cycle is in progress and a 0 when the erase cycle has been completed.
A BE command can be executed only when the Block Protection (BP2, BP1, BP0) bits are set to 0’s. If the BP bits are not zero, the
BE command is not executed and E_ERR is not set. The BE command will skip any sectors protected by the DYB or PPB and the
E_ERR status will not be set.
Figure 103. Bulk Erase Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Phase
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Instruction
Page 95 of 136
S25FL512S
9.6.3
Erase Suspend and Resume Commands (ERSP 75h or ERRS 7Ah)
The Erase Suspend command, allows the system to interrupt a sector erase operation and then read from or program data to, any
other sector. Erase Suspend is valid only during a sector erase operation. The Erase Suspend command is ignored if written during
the Bulk Erase operation.
When the Erase Suspend command is written during the sector erase operation, the device requires a maximum of tESL (erase
suspend latency) to suspend the erase operation and update the status bits. See Table 46 on page 104.
Commands allowed after the Erase Suspend command is issued:
■
Read Status Register 1 (RDSR1 05h)
■
Read Status Register 2 (RDSR2 07h)
The Write in Progress (WIP) bit in Status Register 1 (SR1[0]) must be checked to know when the erase operation has stopped. The
Erase Suspend bit in Status Register-2 (SR2[1]) can be used to determine if an erase operation has been suspended or was completed
at the time WIP changes to 0.
If the erase operation was completed during the suspend operation, a resume command is not needed and has no effect if issued.
Erase Resume commands will be ignored unless an Erase operation is suspended.
See Table 43 on page 97 for the commands allowed while erase is suspend.
After the erase operation has been suspended, the sector enters the erase-suspend mode. The system can read data from or program
data to the device. Reading at any address within an erase-suspended sector produces undetermined data.
A WREN command is required before any command that will change nonvolatile data, even during erase suspend.
The WRR and PPB Erase commands are not allowed during Erase Suspend, it is therefore not possible to alter the Block Protection
or PPB bits during Erase Suspend. If there are sectors that may need programming during Erase suspend, these sectors should be
protected only by DYB bits that can be turned off during Erase Suspend. However, WRR is allowed immediately following the BRAC
command; in this special case the WRR is interpreted as a write to the Bank Address Register, not a write to SR1 or CR1.
If a program command is sent for a location within an erase suspended sector the program operation will fail with the P_ERR bit set.
After an erase-suspended program operation is complete, the device returns to the erase-suspend mode. The system can determine
the status of the program operation by reading the WIP bit in the Status Register, just as in the standard program operation.
The Erase Resume command 7Ah must be written to resume the erase operation if an Erase is suspend. Erase Resume commands
will be ignored unless an Erase is Suspend.
After an Erase Resume command is sent, the WIP bit in the status register will be set to a 1 and the erase operation will continue.
Further Resume commands are ignored.
Erase operations may be interrupted as often as necessary e.g. an erase suspend command could immediately follow an erase
resume command but, in order for an erase operation to progress to completion there must be some periods of time between resume
and the next suspend command greater than or equal to tERS. See Table 46 on page 104.
Figure 104. Erase Suspend (ERSP 75h) Command Sequence
tESL
CS#
SCK
SI
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SO
Phase
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Suspend Instruction
Phase
Status
Read Status Instruction
Instr. During Suspend
Repeat Status Read Until Suspended
Figure 105. Erase Resume (ERRS 7Ah) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Phase
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Instruction
Page 96 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 43. Commands Allowed During Program or Erase Suspend
Instruction
Name
Instruction
Code
(Hex)
Allowed
During
Erase
Suspend
Allowed
During
Program
Suspend
Comment
BRAC
B9
X
X
Bank address register may need to be changed during a suspend to reach
a sector for read or program.
BRRD
16
X
X
Bank address register may need to be changed during a suspend to reach
a sector for read or program.
BRWR
17
X
X
Bank address register may need to be changed during a suspend to reach
a sector for read or program.
CLSR
30
X
–
Clear status may be used if a program operation fails during erase
suspend.
DYBRD
E0
X
–
It may be necessary to remove and restore dynamic protection during
erase suspend to allow programming during erase suspend.
DYBWR
E1
X
–
It may be necessary to remove and restore dynamic protection during
erase suspend to allow programming during erase suspend.
ERRS
7A
X
–
Required to resume from erase suspend.
DDRFR
0D
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.
4DDRFR
0E
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.
FAST_READ
0B
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.
4FAST_READ
0C
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.
MBR
FF
X
X
May need to reset a read operation during suspend.
PGRS
8A
X
X
Needed to resume a program operation. A program resume may also be
used during nested program suspend within an erase suspend.
PGSP
85
X
–
Program suspend allowed during erase suspend.
PP
02
X
–
Required for array program during erase suspend.
4PP
12
X
–
Required for array program during erase suspend.
PPBRD
E2
X
–
Allowed for checking persistent protection before attempting a program
command during erase suspend.
QPP
32, 38
X
–
Required for array program during erase suspend.
4QPP
34
X
–
Required for array program during erase suspend.
4READ
13
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.
RDCR
35
X
X
–
DIOR
BB
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.
4DIOR
BC
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.
DOR
3B
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.
4DOR
3C
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.
DDRDIOR
BD
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.
4DDRDIOR
BE
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.
DDRQIOR
ED
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.
DDRQIOR4
EE
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.
QIOR
EB
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.
4QIOR
EC
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.
QOR
6B
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 97 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 43. Commands Allowed During Program or Erase Suspend (Continued)
Instruction
Name
Instruction
Code
(Hex)
Allowed
During
Erase
Suspend
Allowed
During
Program
Suspend
4QOR
6C
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.
RDSR1
05
X
X
Needed to read WIP to determine end of suspend process.
RDSR2
07
X
X
Needed to read suspend status to determine whether the operation is
suspended or complete.
Comment
READ
03
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.
RESET
F0
X
X
Reset allowed anytime.
WREN
06
X
–
Required for program command within erase suspend.
WRR
01
X
X
Bank register may need to be changed during a suspend to reach a sector
needed for read or program. WRR is allowed when following BRAC.
9.7 One Time Program Array Commands
9.7.1
OTP Program (OTPP 42h)
The OTP Program command programs data in the One Time Program region, which is in a different address space from the main
array data. The OTP region is 1024 bytes so, the address bits from A23 to A10 must be zero for this command. Refer to Section 7.5
OTP Address Space on page 45 for details on the OTP region. The protocol of the OTP Program command is the same as the Page
Program command. Before the OTP Program command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be
issued and decoded by the device, which sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.
To program the OTP array in bit granularity, the rest of the bits within a data byte can be set to 1.
Each region in the OTP memory space can be programmed one or more times, provided that the region is not locked. Attempting to
program zeros in a region that is locked will fail with the P_ERR bit in SR1 set to 1 Programming ones, even in a protected area does
not cause an error and does not set P_ERR. Subsequent OTP programming can be performed only on the un-programmed bits (that
is, 1 data).
Figure 106. Page Program (OTPP 42h) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6 5
4 3
2
1 0 23
5
4 3
2 1
0
7 6
5 4
3 2
1
0 7
6 5
4
3 2
1 0
SO
Instruction
Phase
9.7.2
Address
Input Data 1
Input Data 2
OTP Read (OTPR 4Bh)
The OTP Read command reads data from the OTP region. The OTP region is 1024 bytes so, the address bits from A23 to A10 must
be zero for this command. Refer to Section 7.5 OTP Address Space on page 45 for details on the OTP region. The protocol of the
OTP Read command is similar to the Fast Read command except that it will not wrap to the starting address after the OTP address
is at its maximum; instead, the data beyond the maximum OTP address will be undefined. Also, the OTP Read command is not
affected by the latency code. The OTP read command always has one dummy byte of latency as shown below.
Figure 107. Read OTP (OTPR 4Bh) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4 3
2
1 0 23
1 0
SO
Phase
7 6
Instruction
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Address
Dummy Cycles
5
4 3
2 1 0
Data 1
Page 98 of 136
S25FL512S
9.8 Advanced Sector Protection Commands
9.8.1
ASP Read (ASPRD 2Bh)
The ASP Read instruction 2Bh is shifted into SI by the rising edge of the SCK signal. Then the 16-bit ASP register contents is shifted
out on the serial output SO, LSB first. Each bit is shifted out at the SCK frequency by the falling edge of the SCK signal. It is possible
to read the ASP register continuously by providing multiples of 16 clock cycles. The maximum operating clock frequency for the ASP
Read (ASPRD) command is 133 MHz.
Figure 108. ASPRD Command
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
7
Phase
9.8.2
6
Instruction
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
Register Read
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Repeat Register Read
ASP Program (ASPP 2Fh)
Before the ASP Program (ASPP) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued. After
the Write Enable (WREN) command has been decoded, the device will set the Write Enable Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to
enable any write operations.
The ASPP command is entered by driving CS# to the logic low state, followed by the instruction and two data bytes on SI, LSB first.
The ASP Register is two data bytes in length.
The ASPP command affects the P_ERR and WIP bits of the Status and Configuration Registers in the same manner as any other
programming operation.
CS# input must be driven to the logic high state after the sixteenth bit of data has been latched in. If not, the ASPP command is not
executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic high state, the self-timed ASPP operation is initiated. While the ASPP operation is in
progress, the Status Register may be read to check the value of the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is a
1 during the self-timed ASPP operation, and is a 0 when it is completed. When the ASPP operation is completed, the Write Enable
Latch (WEL) is set to a 0.
Figure 109. ASPP (2Fh) Command
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Phase
9.8.3
Instruction
Input ASPR Low Byte
Input ASPR High Byte
DYB Read (DYBRD E0h)
The instruction E0h is latched into SI by the rising edge of the SCK signal. Followed by the 32-bit address selecting location zero
within the desired sector (note, the high order address bits not used by a particular density device must be zero). Then the 8-bit DYB
access register contents are shifted out on the serial output SO. Each bit is shifted out at the SCK frequency by the falling edge of the
SCK signal. It is possible to read the same DYB access register continuously by providing multiples of eight clock cycles. The address
of the DYB register does not increment so this is not a means to read the entire DYB array. Each location must be read with a separate
DYB Read command. The maximum operating clock frequency for READ command is 133 MHz.
Figure 110. DYBRD Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4 3
2
1 0 31
1 0
SO
Phase
7
Instruction
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Address
6 5
4
3 2
Register
1
0
7 6
5
4
3
2 1 0
Repeat Register
Page 99 of 136
S25FL512S
9.8.4
DYB Write (DYBWR E1h)
Before the DYB Write (DYBWR) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued. After
the Write Enable (WREN) command has been decoded, the device will set the Write Enable Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to
enable any write operations.
The DYBWR command is entered by driving CS# to the logic low state, followed by the instruction, the 32-bit address selecting location
zero within the desired sector (note, the high order address bits not used by a particular density device must be zero), then the data
byte on SI. The DYB Access Register is one data byte in length.
The DYBWR command affects the P_ERR and WIP bits of the Status and Configuration Registers in the same manner as any other
programming operation. CS# must be driven to the logic high state after the eighth bit of data has been latched in. If not, the DYBWR
command is not executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic high state, the self-timed DYBWR operation is initiated. While the
DYBWR operation is in progress, the Status Register may be read to check the value of the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In
Progress (WIP) bit is a 1 during the self-timed DYBWR operation, and is a 0 when it is completed. When the DYBWR operation is
completed, the Write Enable Latch (WEL) is set to a 0.
Figure 111. DYBWR (E1h) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
31
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Phase
9.8.5
Instruction
Address
Input Data
PPB Read (PPBRD E2h)
The instruction E2h is shifted into SI by the rising edges of the SCK signal, followed by the 32-bit address selecting location zero within
the desired sector (note, the high order address bits not used by a particular density device must be zero) Then the 8-bit PPB access
register contents are shifted out on SO.
It is possible to read the same PPB access register continuously by providing multiples of eight clock cycles. The address of the PPB
register does not increment so this is not a means to read the entire PPB array. Each location must be read with a separate PPB Read
command. The maximum operating clock frequency for the PPB Read command is 133 MHz.
Figure 112. PPBRD (E2h) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4 3
2
1 0 31
1 0
SO
Phase
7
Instruction
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Address
6 5
4
3 2
Register
1
0
7 6
5
4
3
2 1 0
Repeat Register
Page 100 of 136
S25FL512S
9.8.6
PPB Program (PPBP E3h)
Before the PPB Program (PPBP) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued. After
the Write Enable (WREN) command has been decoded, the device will set the Write Enable Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to
enable any write operations.
The PPBP command is entered by driving CS# to the logic low state, followed by the instruction, followed by the 32-bit address
selecting location zero within the desired sector (note, the high order address bits not used by a particular density device must be zero).
The PPBP command affects the P_ERR and WIP bits of the Status and Configuration Registers in the same manner as any other
programming operation.
CS# must be driven to the logic high state after the last bit of address has been latched in. If not, the PPBP command is not executed.
As soon as CS# is driven to the logic high state, the self-timed PPBP operation is initiated. While the PPBP operation is in progress,
the Status Register may be read to check the value of the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is a 1 during
the self-timed PPBP operation, and is a 0 when it is completed. When the PPBP operation is completed, the Write Enable Latch (WEL)
is set to a 0.
Figure 113. PPBP (E3h) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
31
1
0
SO
Phase
9.8.7
Instruction
Address
PPB Erase (PPBE E4h)
The PPB Erase (PPBE) command sets all PPB bits to 1. Before the PPB Erase command can be accepted by the device, a Write
Enable (WREN) command must be issued and decoded by the device, which sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) in the Status Register
to enable any write operations.
The instruction E4h is shifted into SI by the rising edges of the SCK signal.
CS# must be driven into the logic high state after the eighth bit of the instruction byte has been latched in on SI. This will initiate the
beginning of internal erase cycle, which involves the pre-programming and erase of the entire PPB memory array. Without CS# being
driven to the logic high state after the eighth bit of the instruction, the PPB erase operation will not be executed.
With the internal erase cycle in progress, the user can read the value of the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit to check if the operation has
been completed. The WIP bit will indicate a 1 when the erase cycle is in progress and a 0 when the erase cycle has been completed.
Erase suspend is not allowed during PPB Erase.
Figure 114. PPB Erase (PPBE E4h) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Phase
9.8.8
Instruction
PPB Lock Bit Read (PLBRD A7h)
The PPB Lock Bit Read (PLBRD) command allows the PPB Lock Register contents to be read out of SO. It is possible to read the
PPB lock register continuously by providing multiples of eight clock cycles. The PPB Lock Register contents may only be read when
the device is in standby state with no other operation in progress. It is recommended to check the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit of the
Status Register before issuing a new command to the device.
Figure 115. PPB Lock Register Read Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
SO
Phase
2
1
0
7
Instruction
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
6
5
4
3
Register Read
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Repeat Register Read
Page 101 of 136
S25FL512S
9.8.9
PPB Lock Bit Write (PLBWR A6h)
The PPB Lock Bit Write (PLBWR) command clears the PPB Lock Register to zero. Before the PLBWR command can be accepted
by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued and decoded by the device, which sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL)
in the Status Register to enable any write operations.
The PLBWR command is entered by driving CS# to the logic low state, followed by the instruction.
CS# must be driven to the logic high state after the eighth bit of instruction has been latched in. If not, the PLBWR command is not
executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic high state, the self-timed PLBWR operation is initiated. While the PLBWR operation
is in progress, the Status Register may still be read to check the value of the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP)
bit is a 1 during the self-timed PLBWR operation, and is a 0 when it is completed. When the PLBWR operation is completed, the Write
Enable Latch (WEL) is set to a 0. The maximum clock frequency for the PLBWR command is 133 MHz.
Figure 116. PPB Lock Bit Write (PLBWR A6h) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Phase
Instruction
9.8.10 Password Read (PASSRD E7h)
The correct password value may be read only after it is programmed and before the Password Mode has been selected by
programming the Password Protection Mode bit to 0 in the ASP Register (ASP[2]). After the Password Protection Mode is selected
the PASSRD command is ignored.
The PASSRD command is shifted into SI. Then the 64-bit Password is shifted out on the serial output SO, LSB first, most significant
bit of each byte first. Each bit is shifted out at the SCK frequency by the falling edge of the SCK signal. It is possible to read the
Password continuously by providing multiples of 64 clock cycles. The maximum operating clock frequency for the PASSRD command
is 133 MHz.
Figure 117. Password Read (PASSRD E7h) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
7
Phase
9.8.11
6
5
Instruction
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
Data 1
4
3
2
1
0
Data N
Password Program (PASSP E8h)
Before the Password Program (PASSP) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued
and decoded by the device. After the Write Enable (WREN) command has been decoded, the device sets the Write Enable Latch
(WEL) to enable the PASSP operation.
The password can only be programmed before the Password Mode is selected by programming the Password Protection Mode bit
to 0 in the ASP Register (ASP[2]). After the Password Protection Mode is selected the PASSP command is ignored.
The PASSP command is entered by driving CS# to the logic low state, followed by the instruction and the password data bytes on SI,
LSB first, most significant bit of each byte first. The password is sixty-four (64) bits in length.
CS# must be driven to the logic high state after the sixty-fourth (64th) bit of data has been latched. If not, the PASSP command is not
executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic high state, the self-timed PASSP operation is initiated. While the PASSP operation is
in progress, the Status Register may be read to check the value of the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit
is a 1 during the self-timed PASSP cycle, and is a 0 when it is completed. The PASSP command can report a program error in the
P_ERR bit of the status register. When the PASSP operation is completed, the Write Enable Latch (WEL) is set to a 0. The maximum
clock frequency for the PASSP command is 133 MHz.
Figure 118. Password Program (PASSP E8h) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Phase
Instruction
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Input Password Low Byte
Input Password High Byte
Page 102 of 136
S25FL512S
9.8.12 Password Unlock (PASSU E9h)
The PASSU command is entered by driving CS# to the logic low state, followed by the instruction and the password data bytes on SI,
LSB first, most significant bit of each byte first. The password is sixty-four (64) bits in length.
CS# must be driven to the logic high state after the sixty-fourth (64th) bit of data has been latched. If not, the PASSU command is not
executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic high state, the self-timed PASSU operation is initiated. While the PASSU operation
is in progress, the Status Register may be read to check the value of the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit
is a 1 during the self-timed PASSU cycle, and is a 0 when it is completed.
If the PASSU command supplied password does not match the hidden password in the Password Register, an error is reported by
setting the P_ERR bit to 1. The WIP bit of the status register also remains set to 1. It is necessary to use the CLSR command to clear
the status register, the RESET command to software reset the device, or drive the RESET# input low to initiate a hardware reset, in
order to return the P_ERR and WIP bits to 0. This returns the device to standby state, ready for new commands such as a retry of the
PASSU command.
If the password does match, the PPB Lock bit is set to 1. The maximum clock frequency for the PASSU command is 133 MHz.
Figure 119. Password Unlock (PASSU E9h) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Phase
Instruction
Input Password High Byte
Input Password Low Byte
9.9 Reset Commands
9.9.1
Software Reset Command (RESET F0h)
The Software Reset command (RESET) restores the device to its initial power up state, except for the volatile FREEZE bit in the
Configuration register CR1[1] and the volatile PPB Lock bit in the PPB Lock Register. The Freeze bit and the PPB Lock bit will remain
set at their last value prior to the software reset. To clear the FREEZE bit and set the PPB Lock bit to its protection mode selected
power on state, a full power-on-reset sequence or hardware reset must be done. Note that the nonvolatile bits in the configuration
register, TBPROT, TBPARM, and BPNV, retain their previous state after a Software Reset. The Block Protection bits BP2, BP1, and
BP0, in the status register will only be reset if they are configured as volatile via the BPNV bit in the Configuration Register (CR1[3])
and FREEZE is cleared to zero . The software reset cannot be used to circumvent the FREEZE or PPB Lock bit protection mechanisms
for the other security configuration bits. The reset command is executed when CS# is brought to high state and requires tRPH time to
execute.
Figure 120. Software Reset (RESET F0h) Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Phase
9.9.2
Instruction
Mode Bit Reset (MBR FFh)
The Mode Bit Reset (MBR) command can be used to return the device from continuous high performance read mode back to normal
standby awaiting any new command. Because some device packages lack a hardware RESET# input and a device that is in a
continuous high performance read mode may not recognize any normal SPI command, a system hardware reset or software reset
command may not be recognized by the device. It is recommended to use the MBR command after a system reset when the RESET#
signal is not available or, before sending a software reset, to ensure the device is released from continuous high performance read
mode.
The MBR command sends Ones on SI or I/O0 for 8 SCK cycles. I/O1 to I/O3 are “don’t care” during these cycles.
Figure 121. Mode Bit (MBR FFh) Reset Command Sequence
CS#
SCK
SI
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Phase
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Instruction
Page 103 of 136
S25FL512S
9.10 Embedded Algorithm Performance Tables
Table 44. Program and Erase Performance
Symbol
Parameter
Min
Typ[49]
Max[50]
Unit
tW
WRR Write Time
–
560
2000
ms
tPP
Page Programming (512 bytes)
–
340
750/1300[51]
µs
tSE
Sector Erase Time
(256-kB logical sectors = 4 x 64 kB physical sectors)
–
520
2600
ms
tBE
Bulk Erase Time (S25FL512S)
–
103
460
sec
Notes
49. Typical program and erase times assume the following conditions: 25°C, VCC = 3.0V; 10,000 cycles; checkerboard data pattern.
50. Under worst case conditions of 90°C; 100,000 cycles max.
51. Industrial temperature range / Industrial Plus temperature range.
Table 45. Program Suspend AC Parameters
Parameter
Program Suspend Latency (tPSL)
Program Resume to next Program
Suspend (tPRS)
Min
Typical
–
Max
Unit
Comments
40
µs
The time from Program Suspend command
until the WIP bit is 0
µs
Minimum is the time needed to issue the next
Program Suspend command but ≥ typical
periods are needed for Program to progress to
completion
0.06
100
–
Min
Typical
Max
Unit
Comments
–
–
45
µs
The time from Erase Suspend command until
the WIP bit is 0
µs
Minimum is the time needed to issue the next
Erase Suspend command but ≥ typical
periods are needed for the Erase to progress
to completion
Table 46. Erase Suspend AC Parameters
Parameter
Erase Suspend Latency (tESL)
Erase Resume to next Erase Suspend
(tERS)
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
0.06
100
–
Page 104 of 136
S25FL512S
10. Data Integrity
10.1 Erase Endurance
Table 47. Erase Endurance
Parameter
Minimum
Unit
Program/Erase cycles per main Flash array sectors
100K
PE cycle
Program/Erase cycles per PPB array or nonvolatile register array[52]
100K
PE cycle
Note
52. Each write command to a nonvolatile register causes a PE cycle on the entire nonvolatile register array. OTP bits and registers internally reside in a separate array
that is not PE cycled.
10.2 Data Retention
Table 48. Data Retention
Minimum
Time
Unit
1K Program/Erase Cycles
20
Years
10K Program/Erase Cycles
20
Years
100K Program/Erase Cycles
2
Years
Parameter
Data Retention Time
Test Conditions
Contact Cypress Sales and FAE for further information on the data integrity. An application note is available at:
www.cypress.com/appnotes.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 105 of 136
S25FL512S
11. Software Interface Reference
11.1 Command Summary
Table 49. S25FL512S Instruction Set (sorted by instruction)
Instruction (Hex)
Command Name
Command Description
Maximum Frequency (MHz)
01
WRR
Write Register
(Status-1, Configuration-1)
02
PP
Page Program (3- or 4-byte
address)
133
03
READ
Read (3- or 4-byte address)
50
04
WRDI
Write Disable
133
05
RDSR1
Read Status Register-1
133
06
WREN
Write Enable
133
07
RDSR2
Read Status Register-2
133
133
0B
FAST_READ
Fast Read (3- or 4-byte address)
133
0C
4FAST_READ
Fast Read (4-byte address)
133
0D
DDRFR
DDR Fast Read (3- or 4-byte
address)
80
0E
4DDRFR
DDR Fast Read (4-byte address)
80
Page Program (4-byte address)
133
Read (4-byte address)
50
12
4PP
13
4READ
14
ABRD
AutoBoot Register Read
133
15
ABWR
AutoBoot Register Write
133
16
BRRD
Bank Register Read
133
17
BRWR
Bank Register Write
133
18
ECCRD
ECC Read
133
2B
ASPRD
ASP Read
133
2F
ASPP
ASP Program
133
30
CLSR
Clear Status Register Erase/Program Fail Reset
133
32
QPP
Quad Page Program (3- or 4-byte
address)
80
34
4QPP
Quad Page Program (4-byte
address)
80
35
RDCR
Read Configuration Register-1
133
80
38
QPP
Quad Page Program (3- or 4-byte
address)
3B
DOR
Read Dual Out (3- or 4-byte
address)
104
3C
4DOR
Read Dual Out (4-byte address)
104
41
DLPRD
42
OTPP
43
Data Learning Pattern Read
133
OTP Program
133
PNVDLR
Program NV Data Learning Register
133
4A
WVDLR
Write Volatile Data Learning
Register
133
4B
OTPR
OTP Read
133
Read Serial Flash Discoverable
Parameters
133
Bulk Erase
133
5A
RSFDP
60
BE
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 106 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 49. S25FL512S Instruction Set (sorted by instruction) (Continued)
Instruction (Hex)
Command Name
Command Description
Maximum Frequency (MHz)
6B
QOR
Read Quad Out (3- or 4-byte
address)
104
6C
4QOR
Read Quad Out (4-byte address)
104
75
ERSP
Erase Suspend
133
7A
ERRS
Erase Resume
133
85
PGSP
Program Suspend
133
8A
PGRS
Program Resume
133
90
READ_ID (REMS)
Read Electronic Manufacturer
Signature
133
9F
RDID
Read ID (JEDEC Manufacturer ID
and JEDEC CFI)
133
A3
MPM
Reserved for Multi-I/O-High Perf
Mode (MPM)
133
A6
PLBWR
PPB Lock Bit Write
133
PPB Lock Bit Read
133
Read Electronic Signature
50
A7
PLBRD
AB
RES
B9
BRAC
Bank Register Access
(Legacy Command formerly used
for Deep Power Down)
133
BB
DIOR
Dual I/O Read (3- or 4-byte address)
104
BC
4DIOR
Dual I/O Read (4-byte address)
104
80
BD
DDRDIOR
DDR Dual I/O Read (3- or 4-byte
address)
BE
4DDRDIOR
DDR Dual I/O Read (4-byte
address)
80
C7
BE
Bulk Erase (alternate command)
133
D8
SE
Erase 256 kB (3- or 4-byte address)
133
DC
4SE
Erase 256 kB (4-byte address)
133
E0
DYBRD
DYB Read
133
E1
DYBWR
DYB Write
133
E2
PPBRD
E3
PPBP
E4
PPBE
E5
Reserved-E5
E6
Reserved-E6
E7
PASSRD
PPB Read
133
PPB Program
133
PPB Erase
133
Reserved
Reserved
Password Read
–
–
133
E8
PASSP
Password Program
133
E9
PASSU
Password Unlock
133
EB
QIOR
Quad I/O Read (3- or 4-byte
address)
104
EC
4QIOR
Quad I/O Read (4-byte address)
104
ED
DDRQIOR
DDR Quad I/O Read (3- or 4-byte
address)
80
EE
4DDRQIOR
DDR Quad I/O Read (4-byte
address)
80
F0
RESET
Software Reset
133
FF
MBR
Mode Bit Reset
133
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 107 of 136
S25FL512S
11.2 Serial Flash Discoverable Parameters (SFDP) Address Map
The SFDP address space has a header starting at address zero that identifies the SFDP data structure and provides a pointer to each
parameter. One Basic Flash parameter is mandated by the JEDEC JESD216B standard. Two optional parameter tables for Sector
Map and 4 Byte Address Instructions follow the Basic Flash table. Cypress provides an additional parameter by pointing to the ID-CFI
address space i.e. the ID-CFI address space is a sub-set of the SFDP address space. The parameter tables portion of the SFDP data
structure are located within the ID-CFI address space and is thus both a CFI parameter and an SFDP parameter. In this way both
SFDP and ID-CFI information can be accessed by either the RSFDP or RDID commands.
Table 50. SFDP Overview Map
Byte Address
0000h
,,,
1000h
...
1120h
...
Description
Location zero within JEDEC JESD216B SFDP space – start of SFDP header
Remainder of SFDP header followed by undefined space
Location zero within ID-CFI space – start of ID-CFI parameter tables
ID-CFI parameters
Start of SFDP parameter which is also one of the CFI parameter tables
Remainder of SFDP parameter tables followed by either more CFI parameters or undefined space
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 108 of 136
S25FL512S
11.2.1
Field Definitions
Table 51. SFDP Header
Relative Byte
Address
SFDP Dword
Address
00h
01h
02h
SFDP Header
1st DWORD
Data
Description
53h
This is the entry point for Read SFDP (5Ah) command i.e. location zero within SFDP space
ASCII “S”
46h
ASCII “F”
44h
ASCII “D”
50h
ASCII “P”
06h
SFDP Minor Revision (06h = JEDEC JESD216 Revision B) This revision is backward
compatible with all prior minor revisions. Minor revisions are changes that define previously
reserved fields, add fields to the end, or that clarify definitions of existing fields. Increments
of the minor revision value indicate that previously reserved parameter fields may have been
assigned a new definition or entire Dwords may have been added to the parameter table.
However, the definition of previously existing fields is unchanged and therefore remain
backward compatible with earlier SFDP parameter table revisions. Software can safely
ignore increments of the minor revision number, as long as only those parameters the
software was designed to support are used i.e. previously reserved fields and additional
Dwords must be masked or ignored . Do not do a simple compare on the minor revision
number, looking only for a match with the revision number that the software is designed to
handle. There is no problem with using a higher number minor revision.
01h
SFDP Major Revision This is the original major revision. This major revision is compatible
with all SFDP reading and parsing software.
06h
05h
Number of Parameter Headers (zero based, 05h = 6 parameters)
07h
FFh
Unused
08h
00h
Parameter ID LSb (00h = JEDEC SFDP Basic SPI Flash Parameter)
00h
Parameter Minor Revision (00h = JESD216) - This older revision parameter header is
provided for any legacy SFDP reading and parsing software that requires seeing a minor
revision 0 parameter header. SFDP software designed to handle later minor revisions should
continue reading parameter headers looking for a higher numbered minor revision that
contains additional parameters for that software revision.
0Ah
01h
Parameter Major Revision (01h = The original major revision - all SFDP software is
compatible with this major revision.
0Bh
09h
Parameter Table Length (in double words = Dwords = 4 byte units) 09h = 9 Dwords
0Ch
20h
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 0 (Dword = 4 byte aligned) JEDEC Basic SPI Flash parameter
byte offset = 1120h
11h
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 1
03h
04h
SFDP Header
2nd DWORD
05h
09h
0Dh
0Eh
Parameter
Header 0 1st
DWORD
Parameter
Header 0 2nd
DWORD
00h
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 2
0Fh
FFh
Parameter ID MSb (FFh = JEDEC defined legacy Parameter ID)
10h
00h
Parameter ID LSb (00h = JEDEC SFDP Basic SPI Flash Parameter)
05h
Parameter Minor Revision (05h = JESD216 Revision A) - This older revision parameter
header is provided for any legacy SFDP reading and parsing software that requires seeing a
minor revision 5 parameter header. SFDP software designed to handle later minor revisions
should continue reading parameter headers looking for a later minor revision that contains
additional parameters.
12h
01h
Parameter Major Revision (01h = The original major revision - all SFDP software is
compatible with this major revision.
13h
10h
Parameter Table Length (in double words = Dwords = 4 byte units) 10h = 16 Dwords
14h
20h
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 0 (Dword = 4 byte aligned) JEDEC Basic SPI Flash parameter
byte offset = 1120h address
11h
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 1
00h
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 2
FFh
Parameter ID MSb (FFh = JEDEC defined Parameter)
11h
15h
16h
17h
Parameter
Header 1 1st
DWORD
Parameter
Header 1 2nd
DWORD
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 109 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 51. SFDP Header (Continued)
Relative Byte
Address
SFDP Dword
Address
Data
Description
18h
00h
Parameter ID LSb (00h = JEDEC SFDP Basic SPI Flash Parameter)
19h
06h
Parameter Minor Revision (06h = JESD216 Revision B)
01h
Parameter Major Revision (01h = The original major revision - all SFDP software is
compatible with this major revision.
1Bh
10h
Parameter Table Length (in double words = Dwords = 4 byte units) 10h = 16 Dwords
1Ch
20h
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 0 (Dword = 4 byte aligned) JEDEC Basic SPI Flash parameter
byte offset = 1120h address
11h
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 1
00h
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 2
FFh
Parameter ID MSb (FFh = JEDEC defined Parameter)
1Ah
1Dh
1Eh
Parameter
Header 2 1st
DWORD
Parameter
Header 2 2nd
DWORD
1Fh
20h
81h
Parameter ID LSb (81h = SFDP Sector Map Parameter)
21h
00h
Parameter Minor Revision (00h = Initial version as defined in JESD216 Revision B)
01h
Parameter Major Revision (01h = The original major revision - all SFDP software that
recognizes this parameter’s ID is compatible with this major revision.
23h
02h
Parameter Table Length (in double words = Dwords = 4 byte units) 02h = 2 Dwords
24h
60h
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 0 (Dword = 4 byte aligned) JEDEC parameter byte offset =
1160h
11h
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 1
00h
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 2
FFh
Parameter ID MSb (FFh = JEDEC defined Parameter)
22h
25h
26h
Parameter
Header 3 1st
DWORD
Parameter
Header 3 2nd
DWORD
27h
28h
84h
Parameter ID LSb (00h = SFDP 4 Byte Address Instructions Parameter)
29h
00h
Parameter Minor Revision (00h = Initial version as defined in JESD216 Revision B)
01h
Parameter Major Revision (01h = The original major revision - all SFDP software that
recognizes this parameter’s ID is compatible with this major revision.
2Bh
02h
Parameter Table Length (in double words = Dwords = 4 byte units) (2h = 2 Dwords)
2Ch
68h
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 0 (Dword = 4 byte aligned) JEDEC parameter byte offset =
1168h
11h
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 1
2Ah
2Dh
2Eh
Parameter
Header 4 1st
DWORD
Parameter
Header 4 2nd
DWORD
00h
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 2
2Fh
FFh
Parameter ID MSb (FFh = JEDEC defined Parameter)
30h
01h
Parameter ID LSb (Spansion Vendor Specific ID-CFI parameter) Legacy Manufacturer ID
01h = AMD / Spansion
01h
Parameter Minor Revision (01h = ID-CFI updated with SFDP Rev B table)
01h
Parameter Major Revision (01h = The original major revision - all SFDP software that
recognizes this parameter’s ID is compatible with this major revision.
33h
5Ch
Parameter Table Length (in double words = Dwords = 4 byte units) CFI starts at 1000h, the
final SFDP parameter (CFI ID = A5) starts at 111Eh (SFDP starting point of 1120h -2hB of
CFI parameter header), for a length of 11EhB excluding the CFI A5 parameter. The final CFI
A5 parameter adds an additional 52hB for a total of 11Eh + 82h = 170hB. 170hB/4 = 5Ch
Dwords.
34h
00h
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 0 (Dword = 4 byte aligned) Entry point for ID-CFI parameter is
byte offset = 1000h relative to SFDP location zero.
10h
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 1
00h
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 2
01h
Parameter ID MSb (01h = JEDEC JEP106 Bank Number 1)
31h
32h
35h
36h
37h
Parameter
Header 5 1st
DWORD
Parameter
Header 5 2nd
DWORD
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 110 of 136
S25FL512S
11.3 Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) Address Map
11.3.1
Field Definitions
Table 52. Manufacturer and Device ID
Byte Address
Data
00h
01h
01h
02h (512 Mb)
02h
20h (512 Mb)
Description
Manufacturer ID for Spansion
Device ID MSB - Memory Interface Type
Device ID LSB - Density
ID-CFI Length - number bytes following. Adding this value to the
current location of 03h gives the address of the last valid location
in the ID-CFI address map. A value of 00h indicates the entire
512-byte ID-CFI space must be read because the actual length of
the ID-CFI information is longer than can be indicated by this
legacy single byte field. The value is OPN dependent.
03h
xxh
04h
00h (Uniform 256-kB sectors)
05h
80h (FL-S Family)
06h
xxh
07h
xxh
ASCII characters for Model
Refer to Section 12 Ordering Information on page 131 for the
model number definitions.
08h
xxh
Reserved
Sector Architecture
Family ID
09h
xxh
Reserved
0Ah
xxh
Reserved
0Bh
xxh
Reserved
0Ch
xxh
Reserved
0Dh
xxh
Reserved
0Eh
xxh
Reserved
0Fh
xxh
Reserved
Table 53. CFI Query Identification String
Byte Address
Data
10h
11h
12h
51h
52h
59h
Query Unique ASCII string “QRY”
13h
14h
02h
00h
Primary OEM Command Set
FL-P backward compatible command set ID
15h
16h
40h
00h
Address for Primary Extended Table
17h
18h
53h
46h
Alternate OEM Command Set
ASCII characters “FS” for SPI (F) interface, S Technology
19h
1Ah
51h
00h
Address for Alternate OEM Extended Table
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Description
Page 111 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 54. CFI System Interface String
Byte Address
Data
1Bh
27h
VCC Min. (erase/program): 100 millivolts
Description
1Ch
36h
VCC Max. (erase/program): 100 millivolts
1Dh
00h
VPP Min. voltage (00h = no VPP present)
1Eh
00h
VPP Max. voltage (00h = no VPP present)
1Fh
06h
Typical timeout per single byte program 2N µs
20h
09h (512B page)
Typical timeout for Min. size Page program 2N µs
(00h = not supported)
21h
09h (256 kB)
Typical timeout per individual sector erase 2N ms
22h
11h (512 Mb)
Typical timeout for full chip erase 2N ms (00h = not supported)
23h
02h
Max. timeout for byte program 2N times typical
24h
02h
Max. timeout for page program 2N times typical
25h
03h
Max. timeout per individual sector erase 2N times typical
26h
03h
Max. timeout for full chip erase 2N times typical
(00h = not supported)
Table 55. Device Geometry Definition for 512-Mb Device
Byte Address
Data
27h
1Ah (512 Mb)
28h
02h
29h
01h
2Ah
09h
2Bh
00h
2Ch
01h
2Dh
FFh
2Eh
00h
2Fh
00h
30h
04h
31h thru 3Fh
FFh
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Description
N
Device Size = 2 bytes;
Flash Device Interface Description;
0000h = x8 only
0001h = x16 only
0002h = x8/x16 capable
0003h = x32 only
0004h = Single I/O SPI, 3-byte address
0005h = Multi I/O SPI, 3-byte address
0102h = Multi I/O SPI, 3- or 4-byte address
Max. number of bytes in multi-byte write = 2N
(0000 = not supported
0009h = 512B page)
Number of Erase Block Regions within device
1 = Uniform Device, 2 = Boot Device
Erase Block Region 1 Information (refer to JEDEC JEP137)
32 sectors = 32-1 = 001Fh
4-kB sectors = 256 bytes x 0010h
RFU
Page 112 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 56. CFI Primary Vendor-Specific Extended Query
Byte Address
Data
40h
50h
41h
52h
42h
49h
Description
Query-unique ASCII string “PRI”
43h
31h
Major version number = 1, ASCII
44h
33h
Minor version number = 3, ASCII
21h
Address Sensitive Unlock (Bits 1-0)
00b = Required
01b = Not Required
Process Technology (Bits 5-2)
0000b = 0.23 µm Floating Gate
0001b = 0.17 µm Floating Gate
0010b = 0.23 µm MirrorBit
0011b = 0.11 µm Floating Gate
0100b = 0.11 µm MirrorBit
0101b = 0.09 µm MirrorBit
1000b = 0.065 µm MirrorBit
46h
02h
Erase Suspend
0 = Not Supported
1 = Read Only
2 = Read and Program
47h
01h
Sector Protect
00 = Not Supported
X = Number of sectors in group
48h
00h
Temporary Sector Unprotect
00 = Not Supported
01 = Supported
49h
08h
Sector Protect/Unprotect Scheme
04 = High Voltage Method
05 = Software Command Locking Method
08 = Advanced Sector Protection Method
09 = Secure
4Ah
00h
Simultaneous Operation
00 = Not Supported
X = Number of Sectors
4Bh
01h
Burst Mode (Synchronous sequential read) support
00 = Not Supported
01 = Supported
4Ch
xxh
Page Mode Type, model dependent
00 = Not Supported
01 = 4 Word Read Page
02 = 8 Read Word Page
03 = 256-Byte Program Page
04 = 512-Byte Program Page
4Dh
00h
ACC (Acceleration) Supply Minimum
00 = Not Supported, 100 mV
4Eh
00h
ACC (Acceleration) Supply Maximum
00 = Not Supported, 100 mV
45h
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 113 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 56. CFI Primary Vendor-Specific Extended Query (Continued)
Byte Address
Data
Description
4Fh
07h
WP# Protection
01 = Whole Chip
04 = Uniform Device with Bottom WP Protect
05 = Uniform Device with Top WP Protect
07 = Uniform Device with Top or Bottom Write Protect (user select)
50h
01h
Program Suspend
00 = Not Supported
01 = Supported
The Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query provides information related to the expanded command set provided by the FL-S
family. The alternate query parameters use a format in which each parameter begins with an identifier byte and a parameter length
byte. Driver software can check each parameter ID and can use the length value to skip to the next parameter if the parameter is not
needed or not recognized by the software.
Table 57. CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Header
Byte Address
Data
Description
51h
41h
52h
4Ch
53h
54h
54h
32h
Major version number = 2, ASCII
55h
30h
Minor version number = 0, ASCII
Query-unique ASCII string “ALT”
Table 58. CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter 0
Parameter Relative
Byte Address
Offset
Data
00h
00h
Parameter ID (Ordering Part Number)
01h
10h
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter. Adding this value
to the current location value +1 = the first byte of the next parameter)
02h
53h
ASCII “S” for manufacturer (Spansion)
03h
32h
04h
35h
05h
46h
06h
4Ch
07h
35h (512 Mb)
08h
31h (512 Mb)
09h
32h (512 Mb)
0Ah
53h
0Bh
xxh
0Ch
xxh
0Dh
xxh
0Eh
xxh
0Fh
xxh
10h
xxh
11h
xxh
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Description
ASCII “25” for Product Characters (Single Die SPI)
ASCII “FL” for Interface Characters (SPI 3 Volt)
ASCII characters for density
ASCII “S” for Technology (65nm MirrorBit)
Reserved for Future Use (RFU)
Page 114 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 59. CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter 80h Address Options
Parameter Relative
Byte Address
Offset
Data
00h
80h
Parameter ID (Ordering Part Number)
01h
01h
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter. Adding this value
to the current location value +1 = the first byte of the next parameter)
F0h
Bits 7:4 - Reserved = 1111b
Bit 3 - AutoBoot support - Ye s= 0b, No = 1b
Bit 2 - 4-byte address instructions supported - Yes = 0b, No = 1b
Bit 1 - Bank address + 3-byte address instructions supported - Yes = 0b, No = 1b
Bit 0 - 3-byte address instructions supported - Yes = 0b, No = 1b
02h
Description
Table 60. CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter 84h Suspend Commands
Parameter Relative
Byte Address
Offset
Data
00h
84h
Parameter ID (Suspend Commands
01h
08h
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter. Adding this value
to the current location value +1 = the first byte of the next parameter)
02h
85h
Program suspend instruction code
03h
28h
Program suspend latency maximum (µs)
04h
8Ah
Program resume instruction code
05h
64h
Program resume to next suspend typical (µs)
06h
75h
Erase suspend instruction code
07h
28h
Erase suspend latency maximum (µs)
08h
7Ah
Erase resume instruction code
09h
64h
Erase resume to next suspend typical (µs)
Description
Table 61. CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter 88h Data Protection
Parameter Relative
Byte Address
Offset
Data
00h
88h
Parameter ID (Data Protection)
01h
04h
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter. Adding this value
to the current location value +1 = the first byte of the next parameter)
02h
0Ah
OTP size 2N bytes, FFh = not supported
03h
01h
OTP address map format, 01h = FL-S format, FFh = not supported
04h
xxh
Block Protect Type, model dependent
00h = FL-P, FL-S, FFh = not supported
05h
xxh
Advanced Sector Protection type, model dependent
01h = FL-S ASP
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Description
Page 115 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 62. CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter 8Ch Reset Timing
Parameter Relative
Byte Address
Offset
Data
00h
8Ch
Parameter ID (Reset Timing)
01h
06h
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter. Adding this value
to the current location value +1 = the first byte of the next parameter)
02h
96h
POR maximum value
03h
01h
POR maximum exponent 2N µs
04h
23h
Hardware Reset maximum value, FFh = not supported
05h
00h
Hardware Reset maximum exponent 2N µs
06h
23h
Software Reset maximum value, FFh = not supported
07h
00h
Software Reset maximum exponent 2N µs
Description
Table 63. CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter 90h - HPLC(SDR)
Parameter Relative
Byte Address Offset
Data
00h
90h
Parameter ID (Latency Code Table)
01h
56h
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter. Adding this value to the
current location value +1 = the first byte of the next parameter)
02h
06h
Number of rows
03h
0Eh
Row length in bytes
04h
46h
Start of header (row 1), ASCII “F” for frequency column header
05h
43h
ASCII “C” for Code column header
06h
03h
Read 3-byte address instruction
Description
07h
13h
Read 4-byte address instruction
08h
0Bh
Read Fast 3-byte address instruction
09h
0Ch
Read Fast 4-byte address instruction
0Ah
3Bh
Read Dual Out 3-byte address instruction
0Bh
3Ch
Read Dual Out 4-byte address instruction
0Ch
6Bh
Read Quad Out 3-byte address instruction
0Dh
6Ch
Read Quad Out 4-byte address instruction
0Eh
BBh
Dual I/O Read 3-byte address instruction
0Fh
BCh
Dual I/O Read 4-byte address instruction
10h
EBh
Quad I/O Read 3-byte address instruction
11h
ECh
Quad I/O Read 4-byte address instruction
12h
32h
Start of row 2, SCK frequency limit for this row (50 MHz)
13h
03h
Latency Code for this row (11b)
14h
00h
Read mode cycles
15h
00h
Read latency cycles
16h
00h
Read Fast mode cycles
17h
00h
Read Fast latency cycles
18h
00h
Read Dual Out mode cycles
19h
00h
Read Dual Out latency cycles
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 116 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 63. CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter 90h - HPLC(SDR) (Continued)
Parameter Relative
Byte Address Offset
Data
1Ah
00h
Read Quad Out mode cycles
1Bh
00h
Read Quad Out latency cycles
1Ch
00h
Dual I/O Read mode cycles
1Dh
04h
Dual I/O Read latency cycles
1Eh
02h
Quad I/O Read mode cycles
1Fh
01h
Quad I/O Read latency cycles
Description
20h
50h
Start of row 3, SCK frequency limit for this row (80 MHz)
21h
00h
Latency Code for this row (00b)
22h
FFh
Read mode cycles (FFh = command not supported at this frequency)
23h
FFh
Read latency cycles
24h
00h
Read Fast mode cycles
25h
08h
Read Fast latency cycles
26h
00h
Read Dual Out mode cycles
27h
08h
Read Dual Out latency cycles
28h
00h
Read Quad Out mode cycles
29h
08h
Read Quad Out latency cycles
2Ah
00h
Dual I/O Read mode cycles
2Bh
04h
Dual I/O Read latency cycles
2Ch
02h
Quad I/O Read mode cycles
2Dh
04h
Quad I/O Read latency cycles
2Eh
5Ah
Start of row 4, SCK frequency limit for this row (90 MHz)
2Fh
01h
Latency Code for this row (01b)
30h
FFh
Read mode cycles (FFh = command not supported at this frequency)
31h
FFh
Read latency cycles
32h
00h
Read Fast mode cycles
33h
08h
Read Fast latency cycles
34h
00h
Read Dual Out mode cycles
35h
08h
Read Dual Out latency cycles
36h
00h
Read Quad Out mode cycles
37h
08h
Read Quad Out latency cycles
38h
00h
Dual I/O Read mode cycles
39h
05h
Dual I/O Read latency cycles
3Ah
02h
Quad I/O Read mode cycles
3Bh
04h
Quad I/O Read latency cycles
3Ch
68h
Start of row 5, SCK frequency limit for this row (104 MHz)
3Dh
02h
Latency Code for this row (10b)
3Eh
FFh
Read mode cycles (FFh = command not supported at this frequency)
3Fh
FFh
Read latency cycles
40h
00h
Read Fast mode cycles
41h
08h
Read Fast latency cycles
42h
00h
Read Dual Out mode cycles
43h
08h
Read Dual Out latency cycles
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 117 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 63. CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter 90h - HPLC(SDR) (Continued)
Parameter Relative
Byte Address Offset
Data
44h
00h
Read Quad Out mode cycles
45h
08h
Read Quad Out latency cycles
46h
00h
Dual I/O Read mode cycles
47h
06h
Dual I/O Read latency cycles
48h
02h
Quad I/O Read mode cycles
49h
05h
Quad I/O Read latency cycles
Description
4Ah
85h
Start of row 6, SCK frequency limit for this row (133 MHz)
4Bh
02h
Latency Code for this row (10b)
4Ch
FFh
Read mode cycles (FFh = command not supported at this frequency)
4Dh
FFh
Read latency cycles
4Eh
00h
Read Fast mode cycles
4Fh
08h
Read Fast latency cycles
50h
FFh
Read Dual Out mode cycles
51h
FFh
Read Dual Out latency cycles
52h
FFh
Read Quad Out mode cycles
53h
FFh
Read Quad Out latency cycles
54h
FFh
Dual I/O Read mode cycles
55h
FFh
Dual I/O Read latency cycles
56h
FFh
Quad I/O Read mode cycles
57h
FFh
Quad I/O Read latency cycles
Table 64. CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter 9Ah - HPLC DDR
Parameter Relative
Byte Address Offset
Data
00h
9Ah
Parameter ID (Latency Code Table)
01h
2Ah
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter. Adding this value to the
current location value +1 = the first byte of the next parameter)
02h
05h
Number of rows
03h
08h
Row length in bytes
04h
46h
Start of header (row 1), ASCII “F” for frequency column header
05h
43h
ASCII “C” for Code column header
06h
0Dh
Read Fast DDR 3-byte address instruction
07h
0Eh
Read Fast DDR 4-byte address instruction
08h
BDh
DDR Dual I/O Read 3-byte address instruction
09h
BEh
DDR Dual I/O Read 4-byte address instruction
0Ah
EDh
Read DDR Quad I/O 3-byte address instruction
0Bh
EEh
Read DDR Quad I/O 4-byte address instruction
Description
0Ch
32h
Start of row 2, SCK frequency limit for this row (50 MHz)
0Dh
03h
Latency Code for this row (11b)
0Eh
00h
Read Fast DDR mode cycles
0Fh
04h
Read Fast DDR latency cycles
10h
00h
DDR Dual I/O Read mode cycles
11h
04h
DDR Dual I/O Read latency cycles
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 118 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 64. CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter 9Ah - HPLC DDR (Continued)
Parameter Relative
Byte Address Offset
Data
Description
12h
01h
Read DDR Quad I/O mode cycles
13h
03h
Read DDR Quad I/O latency cycles
14h
42h
Start of row 3, SCK frequency limit for this row (66 MHz)
15h
00h
Latency Code for this row (00b)
16h
00h
Read Fast DDR mode cycles
17h
05h
Read Fast DDR latency cycles
18h
00h
DDR Dual I/O Read mode cycles
19h
06h
DDR Dual I/O Read latency cycles
1Ah
01h
Read DDR Quad I/O mode cycles
1Bh
06h
Read DDR Quad I/O latency cycles
1Ch
42h
Start of row 4, SCK frequency limit for this row (66 MHz)
1Dh
01h
Latency Code for this row (01b)
1Eh
00h
Read Fast DDR mode cycles
1Fh
06h
Read Fast DDR latency cycles
20h
00h
DDR Dual I/O Read mode cycles
21h
07h
DDR Dual I/O Read latency cycles
22h
01h
Read DDR Quad I/O mode cycles
23h
07h
Read DDR Quad I/O latency cycles
24h
42h
Start of row 5, SCK frequency limit for this row (66 MHz)
25h
02h
Latency Code for this row (10b)
26h
00h
Read Fast DDR mode cycles
27h
07h
Read Fast DDR latency cycles
28h
00h
DDR Dual I/O Read mode cycles
29h
08h
DDR Dual I/O Read latency cycles
2Ah
01h
Read DDR Quad I/O mode cycles
2Bh
08h
Read DDR Quad I/O latency cycles
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 119 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 65. CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter 90h - EHPLC (SDR)
Parameter Relative
Byte Address Offset
Data
00h
90h
Parameter ID (Latency Code Table)
01h
56h
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter. Adding this value to the
current location value +1 = the first byte of the next parameter)
02h
06h
Number of rows
03h
0Eh
Row length in bytes
04h
46h
Start of header (row 1), ASCII “F” for frequency column header
05h
43h
ASCII “C” for Code column header
06h
03h
Read 3-byte address instruction
07h
13h
Read 4-byte address instruction
08h
0Bh
Read Fast 3-byte address instruction
09h
0Ch
Read Fast 4-byte address instruction
0Ah
3Bh
Read Dual Out 3-byte address instruction
0Bh
3Ch
Read Dual Out 4-byte address instruction
0Ch
6Bh
Read Quad Out 3-byte address instruction
0Dh
6Ch
Read Quad Out 4-byte address instruction
0Eh
BBh
Dual I/O Read 3-byte address instruction
0Fh
BCh
Dual I/O Read 4-byte address instruction
10h
EBh
Quad I/O Read 3-byte address instruction
11h
ECh
Quad I/O Read 4-byte address instruction
Description
12h
32h
Start of row 2, SCK frequency limit for this row (50 MHz)
13h
03h
Latency Code for this row (11b)
14h
00h
Read mode cycles
15h
00h
Read latency cycles
16h
00h
Read Fast mode cycles
17h
00h
Read Fast latency cycles
18h
00h
Read Dual Out mode cycles
19h
00h
Read Dual Out latency cycles
1Ah
00h
Read Quad Out mode cycles
1Bh
00h
Read Quad Out latency cycles
1Ch
04h
Dual I/O Read mode cycles
1Dh
00h
Dual I/O Read latency cycles
1Eh
02h
Quad I/O Read mode cycles
1Fh
01h
Quad I/O Read latency cycles
20h
50h
Start of row 3, SCK frequency limit for this row (80 MHz)
21h
00h
Latency Code for this row (00b)
22h
FFh
Read mode cycles (FFh = command not supported at this frequency)
23h
FFh
Read latency cycles
24h
00h
Read Fast mode cycles
25h
08h
Read Fast latency cycles
26h
00h
Read Dual Out mode cycles
27h
08h
Read Dual Out latency cycles
28h
00h
Read Quad Out mode cycles
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 120 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 65. CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter 90h - EHPLC (SDR) (Continued)
Parameter Relative
Byte Address Offset
Data
Description
29h
08h
Read Quad Out latency cycles
2Ah
04h
Dual I/O Read mode cycles
2Bh
00h
Dual I/O Read latency cycles
2Ch
02h
Quad I/O Read mode cycles
2Dh
04h
Quad I/O Read latency cycles
2Eh
5Ah
Start of row 4, SCK frequency limit for this row (90 MHz)
2Fh
01h
Latency Code for this row (01b)
30h
FFh
Read mode cycles (FFh = command not supported at this frequency)
31h
FFh
Read latency cycles
32h
00h
Read Fast mode cycles
33h
08h
Read Fast latency cycles
34h
00h
Read Dual Out mode cycles
35h
08h
Read Dual Out latency cycles
36h
00h
Read Quad Out mode cycles
37h
08h
Read Quad Out latency cycles
38h
04h
Dual I/O Read mode cycles
39h
01h
Dual I/O Read latency cycles
3Ah
02h
Quad I/O Read mode cycles
3Bh
04h
Quad I/O Read latency cycles
3Ch
68h
Start of row 5, SCK frequency limit for this row (104 MHz)
3Dh
02h
Latency Code for this row (10b)
3Eh
FFh
Read mode cycles (FFh = command not supported at this frequency)
3Fh
FFh
Read latency cycles
40h
00h
Read Fast mode cycles
41h
08h
Read Fast latency cycles
42h
00h
Read Dual Out mode cycles
43h
08h
Read Dual Out latency cycles
44h
00h
Read Quad Out mode cycles
45h
08h
Read Quad Out latency cycles
46h
04h
Dual I/O Read mode cycles
47h
02h
Dual I/O Read latency cycles
48h
02h
Quad I/O Read mode cycles
49h
05h
Quad I/O Read latency cycles
4Ah
85h
Start of row 6, SCK frequency limit for this row (133 MHz)
4Bh
02h
Latency Code for this row (10b)
4Ch
FFh
Read mode cycles (FFh = command not supported at this frequency)
4Dh
FFh
Read latency cycles
4Eh
00h
Read Fast mode cycles
4Fh
08h
Read Fast latency cycles
50h
FFh
Read Dual Out mode cycles
51h
FFh
Read Dual Out latency cycles
52h
FFh
Read Quad Out mode cycles
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 121 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 65. CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter 90h - EHPLC (SDR) (Continued)
Parameter Relative
Byte Address Offset
Data
Description
53h
FFh
Read Quad Out latency cycles
54h
FFh
Dual I/O Read mode cycles
55h
FFh
Dual I/O Read latency cycles
56h
FFh
Quad I/O Read mode cycles
57h
FFh
Quad I/O Read latency cycles
Table 66. CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter 9Ah - EHPLC DDR
Parameter Relative
Byte Address Offset
Data
00h
9Ah
Parameter ID (Latency Code Table)
01h
2Ah
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter. Adding this value to the
current location value +1 = the first byte of the next parameter)
02h
05h
Number of rows
Description
03h
08h
Row length in bytes
04h
46h
Start of header (row 1), ASCII “F” for frequency column header
05h
43h
ASCII “C” for Code column header
06h
0Dh
Read Fast DDR 3-byte address instruction
07h
0Eh
Read Fast DDR 4-byte address instruction
08h
BDh
DDR Dual I/O Read 3-byte address instruction
09h
BEh
DDR Dual I/O Read 4-byte address instruction
0Ah
EDh
Read DDR Quad I/O 3-byte address instruction
0Bh
EEh
Read DDR Quad I/O 4-byte address instruction
0Ch
32h
Start of row 2, SCK frequency limit for this row (50 MHz)
0Dh
03h
Latency Code for this row (11b)
0Eh
04h
Read Fast DDR mode cycles
0Fh
01h
Read Fast DDR latency cycles
10h
02h
DDR Dual I/O Read mode cycles
11h
02h
DDR Dual I/O Read latency cycles
12h
01h
Read DDR Quad I/O mode cycles
13h
03h
Read DDR Quad I/O latency cycles
14h
42h
Start of row 3, SCK frequency limit for this row (66 MHz)
15h
00h
Latency Code for this row (00b)
16h
04h
Read Fast DDR mode cycles
17h
02h
Read Fast DDR latency cycles
18h
02h
DDR Dual I/O Read mode cycles
19h
04h
DDR Dual I/O Read latency cycles
1Ah
01h
Read DDR Quad I/O mode cycles
1Bh
06h
Read DDR Quad I/O latency cycles
1Ch
42h
Start of row 4, SCK frequency limit for this row (66 MHz)
1Dh
01h
Latency Code for this row (01b)
1Eh
04h
Read Fast DDR mode cycles
1Fh
04h
Read Fast DDR latency cycles
20h
02h
DDR Dual I/O Read mode cycles
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 122 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 66. CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter 9Ah - EHPLC DDR (Continued)
Parameter Relative
Byte Address Offset
Data
21h
05h
DDR Dual I/O Read latency cycles
22h
01h
Read DDR Quad I/O mode cycles
Description
23h
07h
Read DDR Quad I/O latency cycles
24h
42h
Start of row 5, SCK frequency limit for this row (66 MHz)
25h
02h
Latency Code for this row (10b)
26h
04h
Read Fast DDR mode cycles
27h
05h
Read Fast DDR latency cycles
28h
02h
DDR Dual I/O Read mode cycles
29h
06h
DDR Dual I/O Read latency cycles
2Ah
01h
Read DDR Quad I/O mode cycles
2Bh
08h
Read DDR Quad I/O latency cycles
Table 67. CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter F0h RFU
Parameter Relative
Byte Address
Offset
Data
00h
F0h
Parameter ID (RFU)
01h
0Fh
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter. Adding this value
to the current location value +1 = the first byte of the next parameter)
02h
FFh
RFU
...
FFh
RFU
10h
FFh
RFU
Description
Table 68. CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B
CFI Parameter
Relative Byte
Address Offset
SFDP
Parameter
Relative Byte
Address Offset
SFDP Dword
Name
Data
00h
—
N/A
A5h
CFI Parameter ID (JEDEC SFDP)
01h
—
N/A
50h
CFI Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter. Adding this value
to the current location value +1 = the first byte of the next parameter)
02h
00h
E7h
Start of SFDP JEDEC parameter, located at 1120h in the overall SFDP address space. Bits
7:5 = unused = 111b Bit 4:3 = 06h is status register write instruction & status register is
default nonvolatile= 00b Bit 2 = Program Buffer > 64Bytes = 1 Bits 1:0 = Uniform 4KB erase
unavailable = 11b
03h
01h
FFh
Bits 15:8 = Uniform 4KB erase opcode = not supported = FFh
04h
02h
05h
03h
FFh
06h
04h
FFh
07h
05h
08h
06h
09h
07h
JEDEC Basic Flash
Parameter Dword-1
JEDEC Basic Flash
Parameter Dword-2
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Description
Bit 23 = Unused = 1b Bit 22 = Supports Quad Out Read = Yes = 1b Bit 21 = Supports Quad
F3h (FLxxxSAG) I/O Read = Yes =1b Bit 20 = Supports Dual I/O Read = Yes = 1b Bit19 = Supports DDR 0=
F7h (FLxxxSDP) No, 1 = Yes Bit 18:17 = Number of Address Bytes, 3 or 4 = 01b Bit 16 = Supports Dual Out
Read = Yes = 1b
FFh
FFh
Bits 31:24 = Unused = FFh
Density in bits, zero based, 512Mb = 1FFFFFFFh
1Fh
Page 123 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 68. CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B (Continued)
CFI Parameter
Relative Byte
Address Offset
SFDP
Parameter
Relative Byte
Address Offset
0Ah
08h
0Bh
09h
0Ch
0Ah
0Dh
SFDP Dword
Name
Data
Description
44h
Bits 7:5 = number of Quad I/O Mode cycles = 010b Bits 4:0 = number of Quad I/O Dummy
cycles = 00100b for default latency code 00b
EBh
Quad I/O instruction code
08h
Bits 23:21 = number of Quad Out Mode cycles = 000b Bits 20:16 = number of Quad Out
Dummy cycles = 01000b
0Bh
6Bh
Quad Out instruction code
0Eh
0Ch
08h
Bits 7:5 = number of Dual Out Mode cycles = 000b Bits 4:0 = number of Dual Out Dummy
cycles = 01000b for default latency code
0Fh
0Dh
10h
0Eh
11h
0Fh
BBh
Dual I/O instruction code
12h
10h
EEh
Bits 7:5 RFU = 111b Bit 4 = Quad All supported = No = 0b Bits 3:1 RFU = 111b Bit 0 = Dual
All not supported = 0b
13h
11h
FFh
Bits 15:8 = RFU = FFh
14h
12h
FFh
Bits 23:16 = RFU = FFh
15h
13h
FFh
Bits 31:24 = RFU = FFh
JEDEC Basic Flash
Parameter Dword-3
3Bh
Dual Out instruction code
JEDEC Basic Flash
Parameter Dword-4 04h (HPLC) 80h Bits 23:21 = number of Dual I/O Mode cycles = 100b for EHPLC or 000b for HPLC Bits
20:16 = number of Dual I/O Dummy cycles = 00000b for EHPLC or 00100b for HPLC
(EHPLC)
Default Latency code = 00b
JEDEC Basic Flash
Parameter Dword-5
16h
14h
FFh
Bits 7:0 = RFU = FFh
17h
15h
FFh
Bits 15:8 = RFU = FFh
18h
16h
FFh
Bits 23:21 = number of Dual All Mode cycles = 111b Bits 20:16 = number of Dual All Dummy
cycles = 11111b
19h
17h
FFh
Dual All instruction code
Bits 7:0 = RFU = FFh
JEDEC Basic Flash
Parameter Dword-6
1Ah
18h
FFh
1Bh
19h
FFh
1Ch
1Ah
1Dh
1Bh
1Eh
1Ch
1Fh
1Dh
20h
1Eh
21h
JEDEC Basic Flash
Parameter Dword-7
FFh
Bits 15:8 = RFU = FFh
EBh
Bits 23:21 = number of Quad All Mode cycles = 111b Bits 20:16 = number of Quad All
Dummy cycles = 11111b
00h
Quad All mode Quad I/O (4-4-4) instruction code
FFh
Erase type 1 instruction = not supported = FFh
00h
Erase type 2 size 2N Bytes = not supported = 00h
1Fh
FFh
Erase type 2 instruction = not supported = FFh
22h
20h
12h
Erase type 3 size 2N Bytes = 256KB = 12h
23h
21h
D8h
Erase type 3 instruction
24h
22h
00h
Erase type 4 size 2N Bytes = not supported = 00h
25h
23h
FFh
Erase type 4 instruction = not supported = FFh
Bits 31:30 = Erase type 4 Erase, Typical time units (00b: 1 ms, 01b: 16 ms, 10b: 128 ms,
11b: 1 s) = RFU = 11b Bits 29:25 = Erase type 4 Erase, Typical time count = RFU = 11111b
( typ erase time = count +1 * units = RFU ) Bits 24:23 = Erase type 3 Erase, Typical time
units (00b: 1 ms, 01b: 16 ms, 10b: 128 ms, 11b: 1 s) = 128mS = 10b Bits 22:18 = Erase type
3 Erase, Typical time count = 00011b ( typ erase time = count +1 * units = 4*128mS =
512mS) Bits 17:16 = Erase type 2 Erase, Typical time units (00b: 1 ms, 01b: 16 ms, 10b:
128 ms, 11b: 1 s) = RFU = 11b Bits 15:11 = Erase type 2 Erase, Typical time count = RFU =
11111b ( typ erase time = count +1 * units = RFU ) Bits 10:9 = Erase type 1 Erase, Typical
time units (00b: 1 ms, 01b: 16 ms, 10b: 128 ms, 11b: 1 s) = RFU = 11b Bits 8:4 = Erase type
1 Erase, Typical time count = RFU = 11111b ( typ erase time = count +1 * units = RFU ) Bits
3:0 = Multiplier from typical erase time to maximum erase time = 2*(N+1), N=2h = 6x
multiplier Binary Fields: 11-11111-10-00011-11-11111-11-11111-0010 Nibble Format:
1111_1111_0000_1111_1111_1111_1111_0010 Hex Format: FF_0F_FF_F2
JEDEC Basic Flash
Parameter Dword-8
JEDEC Basic Flash
Parameter Dword-9
26h
24h
F2h
27h
25h
FFh
28h
26h
0Fh
JEDEC Basic Flash
Parameter
Dword-10
29h
27h
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
FFh
Page 124 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 68. CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B (Continued)
CFI Parameter
Relative Byte
Address Offset
SFDP
Parameter
Relative Byte
Address Offset
2Ah
2Bh
2Ch
SFDP Dword
Name
Data
Description
28h
91h
29h
25h
2Ah
07h
Bit 31 Reserved = 1b Bits 30:29 = Chip Erase, Typical time units (00b: 16 ms, 01b: 256 ms,
10b: 4 s, 11b: 64 s) = 4s = 10b Bits 28:24 = Chip Erase, Typical time count, (count+1)*units,
count = 11001b, ( typ Program time = count +1 * units = 26*.4uS = 104S Bits 23 = Byte
Program Typical time, additional byte units (0b:1uS, 1b:8uS) = 1uS = 0b Bits 22:19 = Byte
Program Typical time, additional byte count, (count+1)*units, count = 0000b, ( typ Program
time = count +1 * units = 1*1uS = 1uS Bits 18 = Byte Program Typical time, first byte units
(0b:1uS, 1b:8uS) = 8uS = 1b Bits 17:14 = Byte Program Typical time, first byte count,
(count+1)*units, count = 1100b, ( typ Program time = count +1 * units = 13*8uS = 104uS
Bits 13 = Page Program Typical time units (0b:8uS, 1b:64uS) = 64uS = 1b Bits 12:8 = Page
Program Typical time count, (count+1)*units, count = 00101b, ( typ Program time = count
+1 * units =6*64uS = 384uS) Bits 7:4 = Page size 2N, N=9h, = 512B page Bits 3:0 =
Multiplier from typical time to maximum for Page or Byte program = 2*(N+1), N=1h = 4x
multiplier Binary Fields: 1-10-11001-0-0000-1-1100-1-00101-1001-0001 Nibble Format:
1101_1001_0000_0111_0010_0101_1001_0001 Hex Format: D9_07_25_91
JEDEC Basic Flash
Parameter
Dword-11
2Dh
2Bh
D9h
2Eh
2Ch
ECh
2Fh
2Dh
83h
30h
2Eh
18h
JEDEC Basic Flash
Parameter
Dword-12
31h
2Fh
45h
32h
30h
33h
31h
34h
32h
35h
33h
75h
36h
34h
F7h
37h
35h
FFh
38h
36h
39h
37h
FFh
3Ah
38h
00h
Bit 31 = Suspend and Resume supported = 0b Bits 30:29 = Suspend in-progress erase max
latency units (00b: 128ns, 01b: 1us, 10b: 8us, 11b: 64us) = 8us= 10b Bits 28:24 = Suspend
in-progress erase max latency count = 00101b, max erase suspend latency = count +1 *
units = 6*8uS = 48uS Bits 23:20 = Erase resume to suspend interval count = 0001b, interval
= count +1 * 64us = 2 * 64us = 128us Bits 19:18 = Suspend in-progress program max
latency units (00b: 128ns, 01b: 1us, 10b: 8us, 11b: 64us) = 8us= 10b Bits 17:13 = Suspend
in-progress program max latency count = 00100b, max erase suspend latency = count +1 *
units = 5*8uS = 40uS Bits 12:9 = Program resume to suspend interval count = 0001b,
interval = count +1 * 64us = 2 * 64us = 128us Bit 8 = RFU = 1b Bits 7:4 = Prohibited
operations during erase suspend = xxx0b: May not initiate a new erase anywhere (erase
nesting not permitted) + xx1xb: May not initiate a page program in the erase suspended
sector size + x1xxb: May not initiate a read in the erase suspended sector size + 1xxxb: The
erase and program restrictions in bits 5:4 are sufficient = 1110b Bits 3:0 = Prohibited
Operations During Program Suspend = xxx0b: May not initiate a new erase anywhere
(erase nesting not permitted) + xx0xb: May not initiate a new page program anywhere
(program nesting not permitted) + x1xxb: May not initiate a read in the program suspended
page size + 1xxxb: The erase and program restrictions in bits 1:0 are sufficient = 1100b
Binary Fields: 0-10-00101-0001-10-00100-0001-1-1110-1100 Nibble Format:
0100_0101_0001_1000_1000_0011_1110_1100 Hex Format: 45_18_83_EC
8Ah
JEDEC Basic Flash
Parameter
Dword-13
JEDEC Basic Flash
Parameter
Dword-14
85h
7Ah
FFh
3Bh
39h
F6h
3Ch
3Ah
5Dh
3Dh
3Bh
JEDEC Basic Flash
Parameter
Dword-15
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
FFh
Bits 31:24 = Erase Suspend Instruction = 75h Bits 23:16 = Erase Resume Instruction = 7Ah
Bits 15:8 = Program Suspend Instruction = 85h Bits 7:0 = Program Resume Instruction =
8Ah
Bit 31 = Deep Power Down Supported = not supported = 1 Bits 30:23 = Enter Deep Power
Down Instruction = not supported = FFh Bits 22:15 = Exit Deep Power Down Instruction =
not supported = FFh Bits 14:13 = Exit Deep Power Down to next operation delay units =
(00b: 128ns, 01b: 1us, 10b: 8us, 11b: 64us) = 64us = 11b Bits 12:8 = Exit Deep Power
Down to next operation delay count = 11111b, Exit Deep Power Down to next operation
delay = (count+1)*units = not supported Bits 7:4 = RFU = Fh Bit 3:2 = Status Register
Polling Device Busy = 01b: Legacy status polling supported = Use legacy polling by reading
the Status Register with 05h instruction and checking WIP bit[0] (0=ready; 1=busy). Bits 1:0
= RFU = 11b Binary Fields: 1-11111111-11111111-11-11111-1111-01-11 Nibble Format:
1111_1111_1111_1111_1111_1111_1111_0111 Hex Format: FF_FF_FF_F7
Bits 31:24 = RFU = FFh Bit 23 = Hold and WP Disable = not supported = 0b Bits 22:20 =
Quad Enable Requirements = 101b: QE is bit 1 of the status register 2. Status register 1 is
read using Read Status instruction 05h. Status register 2 is read using instruction 35h. QE
is set via Write Status instruction 01h with two data bytes where bit 1 of the second byte is
one. It is cleared via Write Status with two data bytes where bit 1 of the second byte is zero.
Bits 19:16 0-4-4 Mode Entry Method = xxx1b: Mode Bits[7:0] = A5h Note QE must be set
prior to using this mode + x1xxb: Mode Bits[7:0] = Axh + 1xxxb: RFU = 1101b Bits 15:10
0-4-4 Mode Exit Method = xx_xxx1b: Mode Bits[7:0] = 00h will terminate this mode at the
end of the current read operation + xx_1xxxb: Input Fh (mode bit reset) on DQ0-DQ3 for 8
clocks. This will terminate the mode prior to the next read operation. + x1_xxxxb: Mode
Bit[7:0] != Axh + 1x_x1xx: RFU
Page 125 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 68. CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B (Continued)
CFI Parameter
Relative Byte
Address Offset
SFDP
Parameter
Relative Byte
Address Offset
3Eh
3Fh
40h
SFDP Dword
Name
Data
Description
3Ch
F0h
3Dh
28h
3Eh
FAh
Bits 31:24 = Enter 4-Byte Addressing = xxxx_1xxxb: 8-bit volatile bank register used to
define A[30:A24] bits. MSb (bit[7]) is used to enable/disable 4-byte address mode. When
MSb is set to ‘1’, 4-byte address mode is active and A[30:24] bits are don’t care. Read with
instruction 16h. Write instruction is 17h with 1 byte of data. When MSb is cleared to ‘0’,
select the active 128 Mb segment by setting the appropriate A[30:24] bits and use 3-Byte
addressing. + xx1x_xxxxb: Supports dedicated 4-Byte address instruction set. Consult
vendor data sheet for the instruction set definition or look for 4 Byte Address Parameter
Table. + 1xxx_xxxxb: Reserved = 10101000b Bits 23:14 = Exit 4-Byte Addressing =
xx_xxxx_1xxxb: 8-bit volatile bank register used to define A[30:A24] bits. MSb (bit[7]) is
used to enable/disable 4-byte address mode. When MSb is cleared to ‘0’, 3-byte address
mode is active and A30:A24 are used to select the active 128 Mb memory segment. Read
with instruction 16h. Write instruction is 17h, data length is 1 byte. + xx_xx1x_xxxxb:
Hardware reset + xx_x1xx_xxxxb: Software reset (see bits 13:8 in this DWORD) +
xx_1xxx_xxxxb: Power cycle + x1_xxxx_xxxxb: Reserved + 1x_xxxx_xxxxb: Reserved =
1111101000b Bits 13:8 = Soft Reset and Rescue Sequence Support = x0_1xxxb: issue
instruction F0h + 1x_xxxxb: exit 0-4-4 mode is required prior to other reset sequences
above if the device may be operating in this mode. = 101000b Bit 7 = RFU = 1 Bits 6:0 =
Volatile or Nonvolatile Register and Write Enable Instruction for Status Register 1 =
xx1_xxxxb: Status Register 1 contains a mix of volatile and nonvolatile bits. The 06h
instruction is used to enable writing of the register. + x1x_xxxxb: Reserved + 1xx_xxxxb:
Reserved = 1110000b Binary Fields: 10101000-1111101000-101000-1-1110000 Nibble
Format: 1010_1000_1111_1010_0010_1000_1111_0000 Hex Format: A8_FA_28_F0
JEDEC Basic Flash
Parameter
Dword-16
41h
3Fh
A8h
42h
40h
43h
41h
44h
42h
45h
43h
46h
44h
F4h
47h
45h
FFh
48h
46h
FFh
JEDEC Sector Map
Parameter Dword-1
Config-0 Header
00h
00h
FFh
FFh
JEDEC Sector Map
Parameter Dword-2
Config-0 Region-0
49h
47h
03h
4Ah
48h
FFh
4Bh
49h
E8h
4Ch
4Ah
FFh
4Dh
4Bh
4Eh
4Ch
4Fh
4Dh
50h
4Eh
51h
4Fh
Bits 31:24 = RFU = FFh Bits 23:16 = Region count (Dwords -1) = 00h: One region Bits 15:8
= Configuration ID = 00h: Uniform 256KB sectors Bits 7:2 = RFU = 111111b Bit 1 = Map
Descriptor = 1 Bit 0 = The end descriptor = 1
JEDEC 4 Byte
Address
Instructions
Parameter Dword-1
JEDEC 4 Byte
Address
Instructions
Parameter Dword-2
FFh
Bits 31:8 = Region size = 00FFFFh: Region size as count-1 of 256 Byte units = 64MB/256 =
256K Count = 262144, value = count -1 = 262144 -1 = 262143 = 3FFFFh
Bits 4:7 = RFU = Fh Erase Type not supported = 0/ supported = 1
Bits 3 = Erase Type 4 support = 0b ---Erase Type 4 is not defined
Bits 2 = Erase Type 3 support = 1b ---Erase Type 3 is 256KB erase and is supported in the
256KB sector region
Bits 1 = Erase Type 2 support = 0b ---Erase Type 2 is 64KB erase and is not supported in
the 256KB sector region
Bits 0 = Erase Type 1 support = 0b --- Erase Type 1 is 4KB erase and is not supported in
the 256KB sector region
Format: 0000_0011_1111_1111_1111_1111_1111_0100 Hex Format: 03_FF_FF_F4
Supported = 1, Not Supported = 0 Bits 31:20 = RFU = FFFh Bit 19 = Support for nonvolatile
individual sector lock write command, Instruction=E3h = 1 Bit 18 = Support for nonvolatile
individual sector lock read command, Instruction=E2h = 1 Bit 17 = Support for volatile
individual sector lock Write command, Instruction=E1h = 1 Bit 16 = Support for volatile
individual sector lock Read command, Instruction=E0h = 1 Bit 15 = Support for (1-4-4)
DTR_Read Command, Instruction=EEh = 1 Bit 14 = Support for (1-2-2) DTR_Read
Command, Instruction=BEh = 1 Bit 13 = Support for (1-1-1) DTR_Read Command,
Instruction=0Eh = 1 Bit 12 = Support for Erase Command – Type 4 = 0 Bit 11 = Support for
Erase Command – Type 3 = 1 Bit 10 = Support for Erase Command – Type 2 = 0 Bit 9 =
Support for Erase Command – Type 1 = 0 Bit 8 = Support for (1-4-4) Page Program
Command, Instruction=3Eh =0 Bit 7 = Support for (1-1-4) Page Program Command,
Instruction=34h = 1 Bit 6 = Support for (1-1-1) Page Program Command, Instruction=12h =
1 Bit 5 = Support for (1-4-4) FAST_READ Command, Instruction=ECh = 1 Bit 4 = Support
for (1-1-4) FAST_READ Command, Instruction=6Ch = 1 Bit 3 = Support for (1-2-2)
FAST_READ Command, Instruction=BCh = 1 Bit 2 = Support for (1-1-2) FAST_READ
Command, Instruction=3Ch = 1 Bit 1 = Support for (1-1-1) FAST_READ Command,
Instruction=0Ch = 1 Bit 0 = Support for (1-1-1) READ Command, Instruction=13h = 1
FFh
FFh
DCh
Bits 31:24 = FFh = Instruction for Erase Type 4: RFU Bits 23:16 = DCh = Instruction for
Erase Type 3 Bits 15:8 = FFh = Instruction for Erase Type 2: RFU Bits 7:0 = FFh =
Instruction for Erase Type 1: RFU
FFh
This parameter type (Parameter ID F0h) may appear multiple times and have a different length each time. The parameter is used to
reserve space in the ID-CFI map or to force space (pad) to align a following parameter to a required boundary.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 126 of 136
S25FL512S
11.4 Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) ASO Map — Automotive Only
The CFI Primary Vendor-Specific Extended Query is extended to include Electronic Marking information for device traceability.
Address
Data Field
# of
bytes
Format
Example of
Actual Data
(SA) + 0180h
Size of Electronic Marking
1
Hex
20
14h
1
Hex
1
01h
(SA) + 0181h Revision of Electronic Marking
Data
Hex Read Out of Example Data
(SA) + 0182h
Fab Lot #
8
ASCII
LD87270
(SA) + 018Ah
Wafer #
1
Hex
23
17h
4Ch, 44h, 38h, 37h, 32h, 37h, 30h, FFh
(SA) + 018Bh
Die X Coordinate
1
Hex
10
0Ah
(SA) + 018Ch
Die Y Coordinate
1
Hex
15
0Fh
(SA) + 018Dh
Class Lot #
7
ASCII
BR33150
(SA) + 0194h
Reserved for Future
12
N/A
N/A
42h, 52h, 33h, 33h, 31h, 35h, 30h
FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh,
FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh
Fab Lot # + Wafer # + Die X Coordinate + Die Y Coordinate gives a unique ID for each device.
11.5 Registers
The register maps are copied in this section as a quick reference. See Section 7.6 Registers on page 47 for the full description of the
register contents.
Table 69. Status Register-1 (SR1)
Field
Name
Function
7
SRWD
Status Register
Write Disable
Nonvolatile
0
1 = Locks state of SRWD, BP, and configuration
register bits when WP# is low by ignoring WRR
command
0 = No protection, even when WP# is low
6
P_ERR
Programming
Error Occurred
Volatile, Read only
0
1 = Error occurred
0 = No Error
5
E_ERR
Erase Error
Occurred
Volatile, Read only
0
1= Error occurred
0 = No Error
4
BP2
Block
Protection
Volatile if CR1[3]=1,
Nonvolatile if
CR1[3]=0
Bits
3
BP1
2
BP0
1
0
WEL
Write Enable
Latch
WIP
Write in
Progress
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Type
Volatile
Volatile, Read only
Default State
Description
1 if CR1[3]=1,
Protects selected range of sectors (Block) from
0 when
shipped from Program or Erase
Cypress
0
1 = Device accepts Write Registers (WRR), program
or erase commands
0 = Device ignores Write Registers (WRR), program
or erase commands
This bit is not affected by WRR, only WREN and
WRDI commands affect this bit.
0
1= Device Busy, a Write Registers (WRR), program,
erase or other operation is in progress
0 = Ready Device is in standby mode and can accept
commands
Page 127 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 70. Configuration Register (CR1)
Bits
Field Name
7
LC1
6
LC0
Default
State
Function
Type
Latency Code
Nonvolatile
OTP
0
1 = BP starts at bottom (Low address)
0 = BP starts at top (High address)
0
0
Description
Selects number of initial read latency cycles
See Latency Code Tables
5
TBPROT
Configures Start of
Block Protection
4
RFU
RFU
RFU
0
Reserved for Future Use
3
BPNV
Configures BP2-0 in
Status Register
OTP
0
1 = Volatile
0 = Nonvolatile
2
RFU
RFU
RFU
0
Reserved for Future Use
1
QUAD
Puts the device into
Quad I/O operation
Nonvolatile
0
1 = Quad
0 = Dual or Serial
FREEZE
Lock current state of
BP2-0 bits in Status
Register, TBPROT
in Configuration
Register, and OTP
regions
Volatile
0
1 = Block Protection and OTP locked
0 = Block Protection and OTP un-locked
0
Table 71. Status Register-2 (SR2)
Bits
Field Name
Function
Type
Default State
Description
7
RFU
Reserved
–
0
Reserved for Future Use
6
RFU
Reserved
–
0
Reserved for Future Use
5
RFU
Reserved
–
0
Reserved for Future Use
4
RFU
Reserved
–
0
Reserved for Future Use
3
RFU
Reserved
–
0
Reserved for Future Use
2
RFU
Reserved
–
0
Reserved for Future Use
1
ES
Erase Suspend
Volatile, Read only
0
1 = In erase suspend mode.
0 = Not in erase suspend mode.
0
PS
Program
Suspend
Volatile, Read only
0
1 = In program suspend mode.
0 = Not in program suspend mode.
Table 72. Bank Address Register (BAR)
Bits
Field Name
Function
Type
Default State
7
EXTADD
Extended Address
Enable
Volatile
0b
6 to 2
RFU
Reserved
Volatile
00000b
1
BA25
Bank Address
Volatile
0
A25 for 512 Mb device
0
RFU
Bank Address
Volatile
0
RFU for lower density device
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Description
1 = 4-byte (32-bits) addressing required from command.
0 = 3-byte (24-bits) addressing from command + Bank
Address
Reserved for Future Use
Page 128 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 73. ASP Register (ASPR)
Bits
Field Name
Function
Type
Default
State
15 to 9
RFU
Reserved
OTP
1
Description
Reserved for Future Use
8
RFU
Reserved
OTP
7
RFU
Reserved
OTP
6
RFU
Reserved
OTP
5
RFU
Reserved
OTP
Reserved for Future Use
4
RFU
Reserved
OTP
Note [53] Reserved for Future Use
3
RFU
Reserved
OTP
Reserved for Future Use
2
PWDMLB
Password
Protection Mode
Lock Bit
OTP
1
0 = Password Protection Mode permanently enabled.
1 = Password Protection Mode not permanently enabled.
1
PSTMLB
Persistent
Protection Mode
Lock Bit
OTP
1
0 = Persistent Protection Mode permanently enabled.
1 = Persistent Protection Mode not permanently enabled.
0
RFU
Reserved
OTP
1
Reserved for Future Use
Note [53]
1
Reserved for Future Use
Reserved for Future Use
Reserved for Future Use
Note
53. Default value depends on ordering part number, see Initial Delivery State on page 130.
Table 74. Password Register (PASS)
Bits
Field
Name
Function
Type
63 to 0
PWD
Hidden
Password
OTP
Default State
Description
Nonvolatile OTP storage of 64-bit password. The password
FFFFFFFF-FFFFFF
is no longer readable after the password protection mode is
FFh
selected by programming ASP register bit 2 to zero.
Table 75. PPB Lock Register (PPBL)
Bits
Field Name
Function
Type
Default State
7 to 1
RFU
Reserved
Volatile
00h
0
PPBLOCK Protect PPB Array
Volatile
Description
Reserved for Future Use
0 = PPB array protected until next power
Persistent Protection Mode = 1 cycle or hardware reset
Password Protection Mode = 0 1 = PPB array may be programmed or
erased
Table 76. PPB Access Register (PPBAR)
Bits
7 to 0
Field Name
PPB
Function
Read or Program
per sector PPB
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Type
Nonvolatile
Default
State
Description
FFh
00h = PPB for the sector addressed by the PPBRD or
PPBP command is programmed to ‘0’, protecting that
sector from program or erase operations.
FFh = PPB for the sector addressed by the PPBRD or
PPBP command is erased to ‘1’, not protecting that
sector from program or erase operations.
Page 129 of 136
S25FL512S
Table 77. DYB Access Register (DYBAR)
Bits
7 to 0
Field Name
DYB
Function
Read or Write
per sector DYB
Type
Default State
Description
FFh
00h = DYB for the sector addressed by the DYBRD or DYBP
command is cleared to ‘0’, protecting that sector from program or
erase operations.
FFh = DYB for the sector addressed by the DYBRD or DYBP
command is set to ‘1’, not protecting that sector from program or
erase operations.
Volatile
Table 78. Nonvolatile Data Learning Register (NVDLR)
Bits
7 to 0
Field Name
Function
NVDLP
Nonvolatile
Data Learning
Pattern
Type
Default State
Description
00h
OTP value that may be transferred to the host during DDR read
command latency (dummy) cycles to provide a training pattern to
help the host more accurately center the data capture point in
the received data bits.
Default State
Description
OTP
Table 79. Volatile Data Learning Register (NVDLR)
Bits
7 to 0
Field Name
Function
VDLP
Volatile Data
Learning
Pattern
Type
Volatile
Takes the
value of
Volatile copy of the NVDLP used to enable and deliver the Data
NVDLR
Learning Pattern (DLP) to the outputs. The VDLP may be
during POR changed by the host during system operation.
or Reset
11.6 Initial Delivery State
The device is shipped from Cypress with nonvolatile bits set as follows:
■
The entire memory array is erased: i.e. all bits are set to 1 (each byte contains FFh).
■
The OTP address space has the first 16 bytes programmed to a random number. All other bytes are erased to FFh.
■
The SFDP address space contains the values as defined in the description of the SFDP address space.
■
The ID-CFI address space contains the values as defined in the description of the ID-CFI address space.
■
The Status Register 1 contains 00h (all SR1 bits are cleared to 0’s).
■
The Configuration Register 1 contains 00h.
■
The Autoboot register contains 00h.
■
The Password Register contains FFFFFFFF-FFFFFFFFh
■
All PPB bits are 1.
■
The ASP Register contents depend on the ordering options selected:
Table 80. ASP Register Content
Ordering Part Number Model
ASPR Default Value
01, 21, 31, R1, A1, B1, C1, D1,91, Q1, 71, 61, 81
FE7Fh
K1, L1. S1, T1, Y1, Z1, M1, N1, U1, V1, W1, X1
FE4Fh
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 130 of 136
S25FL512S
12 Ordering Information
The ordering part number is formed by a valid combination of the following:
S25FL
512
S
AG
M
F
I
0
1
1
Packing Type
0 = Tray
1 = Tube
3 = 13” Tape and Reel
Model Number (Sector Type)
1 = Uniform 256-kB sectors[54]
Model Number (Latency Type, Package Details, RESET# and VIO Support)
0 = EHPLC, SO footprint
2 = EHPLC, 5 x 5 ball BGA footprint
3 = EHPLC, 4 x 6 ball BGA footprint
G = EHPLC, SO footprint with RESET#
R = EHPLC, SO footprint with RESET# and VIO
A = EHPLC, 5 x 5 ball BGA footprint with RESET# and VIO
B = EHPLC, 4 x 6 ball BGA footprint with RESET# and VIO
C = EHPLC, 5 x 5 ball BGA footprint with RESET#
D = EHPLC, 4 x 6 ball BGA footprint with RESET#
9 = HPLC, SO footprint
4 = HPLC, 5 x 5 ball BGA footprint
8 = HPLC, 4 x 6 ball BGA footprint
H = HPLC, SO footprint with RESET#
Q = HPLC, SO footprint with RESET# and VIO
7 = HPLC, 5 x 5 ball BGA footprint with RESET# and VIO
6 = HPLC, 4 x 6 ball BGA footprint with RESET# and VIO
E = HPLC, 5 x 5 ball BGA footprint with RESET#
F = HPLC, 4 x 6 ball BGA footprint with RESET#
Temperature Range
I = Industrial (–40°C to + 85°C)
V = Industrial Plus (–40°C to + 105°C)
A = Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade 3 (–40°C to + 85°C)
B = Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade 2 (–40°C to + 105°C)
M = Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade 1 (–40°C to + 125°C)
Package Materials[57]
F = Halogen-free, Lead (Pb)-free
H = Halogen free, Lead (Pb)-free
Package Type
M = 16-pin SO package
B = 24-ball BGA 6 x 8 mm package, 1.00 mm pitch
Speed
AG = 133 MHz
DP = 66 MHz DDR
DS = 80 MHz DDR
Device Technology
S = 65 nm MirrorBit Process Technology
Density
512 = 512 Mb
Device Family
S25FL
Cypress Memory 3.0 V-Only, Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Flash Memory
Notes
54. Uniform 256-kB sectors = All sectors are uniform 256-kB with a 512B programming buffer.
55. EHPLC = Enhanced High Performance Latency Code table.
56. HPLC = High Performance Latency Code table.
57. Halogen free definition is in accordance with IE 61249-2-21 specification.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 131 of 136
S25FL512S
12.1 Valid Combinations — Standard
Valid Combinations list configurations planned to be supported in volume for this device. Consult your local sales office to confirm
availability of specific valid combinations and to check on newly released combinations.
Valid Combinations — Standard
Base Ordering
Part Number
Speed
Option
AG
S25FL512S
DP
DS
Package and
Temperature
Package Marking[58]
Model Number
Packing Type
MFI, MFV
01, G1, R1
0, 1, 3
FL512S + A + (Temp) + F + (Model Number)
BHI, BHV
21, 31, A1, B1, C1, D1
0, 3
FL512S + A + (Temp) + H + (Model Number)
MFI, MFV
01, G1
0, 1, 3
FL512S + D + (Temp) + F + (Model Number)
BHI, BHV
21, 31, C1, D1
0, 3
FL512S + D + (Temp) + H + (Model Number)
MFI, MFV
01, G1, R1
0, 1, 3
FL512S + S + (Temp) + F + (Model Number)
BHI, BHV
21, 31, A1, B1, C1, D1
0, 3
FL512S + S + (Temp) + H + (Model Number)
Note
58. Example, S25FL512SAGMFI000 package marking would be FL512SAIF00.
12.2 Valid Combinations — Automotive Grade / AEC-Q100
The table below lists configurations that are Automotive Grade / AEC-Q100 qualified and are planned to be available in volume. The
table will be updated as new combinations are released. Consult your local sales representative to confirm availability of specific
combinations and to check on newly released combinations.
Production Part Approval Process (PPAP) support is only provided for AEC-Q100 grade products.
Products to be used in end-use applications that require ISO/TS-16949 compliance must be AEC-Q100 grade products in
combination with PPAP. Non–AEC-Q100 grade products are not manufactured or documented in full compliance with
ISO/TS-16949 requirements.
AEC-Q100 grade products are also offered without PPAP support for end-use applications that do not require ISO/TS-16949
compliance.
Valid Combinations — Automotive Grade / AEC-Q100
Base Ordering
Part Number
Speed
Option
AG
S25FL512S
DP
DS
Package and
Temperature
Model Number
Packing Type
Package Marking
MFA, MFB,
MFM
01, G1, R1
0, 1, 3
FL512S + A + (Temp) + F + (Model Number)
BHA, BHB,
BHM
21, 31, A1, B1, C1, D1
0, 3
FL512S + A + (Temp) + H + (Model Number)
BHB
21, C1
0, 3
FL512S + D + (Temp) + H + (Model Number)
MFA, MFB,
MFM
01, G1, R1
0, 1, 3
FL512S + S + (Temp) + F + (Model Number)
BHA, BHB,
BHM
21, 31, A1, B1, C1, D1
0, 3
FL512S + S + (Temp) + H + (Model Number)
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 132 of 136
S25FL512S
13. Revision History
Document History Page
Document Title: S25FL512S, 512 Mb (64 MB), 3.0 V SPI Flash Memory
Document Number: 001-98284
Rev.
ECN No.
Orig. of
Change
Submission
Date
**
–
BWHA
12/20/2011
Initial release
03/02/2012
General: Changed data sheet designation from Advance Information to Preliminary
Performance Summary: Current Consumption table: corrected Serial Read 50 MHz and
Serial Read 133 MHz values
DC Characteristics: DC Characteristics table: corrected ICC1 values
SDR AC Characteristics: AC Characteristics (Single Die Package, VIO = VCC 2.7V to
3.6V) table: corrected TCSH and TSU Max values
AC Characteristics (Single Die Package, VIO 1.65V to 2.7V, VCC 2.7V to 3.6V) table:
corrected TCSH and TSU Max values
Embedded Algorithm Performance Tables: Program and Erase Performance table: corrected TW Typ and Max values
Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) Address Map: Updated table: CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter 0
*A
–
BWHA
Description of Change
*B
–
BWHA
05/02/2012
Global: Added 105°C updates
Ordering Information: Updated Valid Combinations table
Embedded Algorithm Performance Tables: Updated table: Program and Erase Performance
*C
–
BWHA
06/13/2012
SDR AC Characteristics: Updated tHO value from 0 Min to 2 ns Min
*D
–
BWHA
04/12/2013
Global: Data Sheet designation updated from Preliminary to Full Production
*E
–
BWHA
12/20//2013
Global 80 MHz DDR Read operation added
Performance Summary:
Updated Maximum Read Rates DDR (VIO = VCC = 3V to 3.6V) table
Current Consumption table: added Quad DDR Read 80 MHz
Migration Notes FL Generations Comparison table: updated DDR values for FL-S
SDR AC Characteristics:Updated Clock Timing figure
DDR AC Characteristics: Updated AC Characteristics — DDR Operation table
DDR Output Timing: Updated SPI DDR Data Valid Window figure and Notes
Ordering Information:
Added 80 MHz to Speed option
Valid Combinations table: added DS to Speed Option
*F
–
BWHA
01/08/2014
DDR AC Characteristics: Removed AC Characteristics 80 MHz Operation table.
12/18/2014
SDR AC Characteristics: AC Characteristics (Single Die Package, VIO = VCC 2.7V to
3.6V) table: removed tV (Min) value.
AC Characteristics (Single Die Package, VIO 1.65V to 2.7V, VCC 2.7V to 3.6V) table:
removed tV (Min) value.
Bank Address Register: Bank Address Register (BAR) table: corrected Bit 0.
Serial Flash Discoverable Parameters (SFDP) Address Map:
Updated section SFDP Overview Map table: updated
Field Definitions: updated SFDP Header table.
Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) Address Map: Field Definitions: added
CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B
table.
01/21/2015
Capacitance Characteristics: Capacitance table: added TA = 25°C under Test
Conditions.
SDR AC Characteristics: AC Characteristics (Single Die Package, VIO = VCC 2.7V to
3.6V) table: changed tSU (Min).
Configuration Register 1 (CR1): Latency Codes for DDR Enhanced High Performance
table: added 80 MHz
Command Set Summary: S25FL512S Command Set (sorted by function) table:
updated Maximum Frequency (MHz) of DDR Command Descriptions to 80 MHz.
Read Memory Array Commands: Changed 66 MHz to 80 MHz throughout section.
Software Interface Reference: S25FL512S Instruction Set (sorted by instruction) table:
updated Maximum Frequency (MHz) of DDR Command Descriptions to 80 MHz.
*G
*H
–
–
BWHA
BWHA
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 133 of 136
S25FL512S
Document History Page (Continued)
Document Title: S25FL512S, 512 Mb (64 MB), 3.0 V SPI Flash Memory
Document Number: 001-98284
Rev.
*I
ECN No.
4871631
Orig. of
Change
BWHA
Submission
Date
Description of Change
08/24/2015
Replaced “Automotive Temperature Range” with “Industrial Plus Temperature Range” in
all instances across the document.
Updated Section 2. Signal Descriptions on page 8:
Updated Section 2.11 Versatile I/O Power Supply (VIO) on page 11:
Updated description.
Updated to Cypress template.
*J
5347120
TOCU
09/20/2016
Added ECC related information in all instances across the document.
Added “Extended”, “Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade 3”, “Automotive, AECQ100 Grade 2”,
“Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade 1” temperature range related information in all instances
across the document.
Added Logic Block Diagram.
Updated Section 4. Electrical Specifications on page 24:
Added Section 4.2 Thermal Resistance on page 24.
Updated Section 4.4 Power-Up and Power-Down on page 25:
Updated Table 6:
Changed minimum value of VCC (low) parameter from 1.0 V to 1.6 V.
Changed minimum value of tPD parameter from 1.0 µs to 10.0 µs.
Updated Section 5. Timing Specifications on page 28:
Updated Section 5.4 SDR AC Characteristics on page 32:
Updated Table 11:
Updated Table 12:
RUpdated Section 5.5 DDR AC Characteristics on page 36:
Updated Table 13:
Changed minimum value of tHO parameter corresponding to 66 MHz from 0 ns to 1.5 ns.
Removed minimum value of tV parameter.
Updated Section 7. Address Space Maps on page 44:
Updated Section 7.6 Registers on page 47:
Added Section 7.6.6 ECC Status Register (ECCSR) on page 53.
Added Table 17.
Updated Section 9. Commands on page 62:
Updated Section 9.1 Command Set Summary on page 63:
Updated Section 9.1.1 Extended Addressing on page 63:
Updated Table 39:
Updated Section 9.3 Register Access Commands on page 70:
Updated Section 9.3.7 Write Registers (WRR 01h) on page 72:
Updated description.
Added Section 9.3.11 ECC Status Register Read (ECCRD 18h) on page 75.
Updated Section 9.5 Program Flash Array Commands on page 92:
Updated Section 9.5.1 Program Granularity on page 92:
Added Section 9.5.1.1 Automatic ECC on page 92.
Added Section 10. Data Integrity on page 105.
Updated Section 12 Ordering Information on page 131:
No change in part numbers.
Added Section 12.2 Valid Combinations — Automotive Grade / AEC-Q100 on page 132.
Updated to new template.
*K
5613561
ECAO
03/17/2017
Updated tSU in Table 11, AC Characteristics (Single Die Package, VIO = VCC 2.7V to
3.6V) on page 32.
Updated Cypress logo and Sales page.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 134 of 136
S25FL512S
Document History Page (Continued)
Document Title: S25FL512S, 512 Mb (64 MB), 3.0 V SPI Flash Memory
Document Number: 001-98284
Rev.
*L
ECN No.
5700261
Orig. of
Change
BWHA
Submission
Date
Description of Change
05/22/2017
Remove Extended Temperature Range MPN option Section 12 Ordering Information
on page 131.
Updated Package Drawings Section 6.1 SOIC 16-Lead Package on page 38,
Section 6.2 FAB024 24-Ball BGA Package on page 40, Section 6.3 FAC024 24-Ball BGA
Package on page 42.
Updated Section 9.5.3 Quad Page Program (QPP 32h or 38h, or 4QPP 34h) on page 93.
Added “DP” speed option in Section Valid Combinations — Automotive Grade / AECQ100 on page 132.
*M
5959962
BWHA
11/10/2017
Updated Table 5 on page 24.
Corrected JEDEC Sector Map Parameter Dword-2 in Table 68 on page 123.
Updated Section 12 Ordering Information on page 131 definition of letters in OPN
indicating package material.
Updated Section 5.5.3 DDR Data Valid Timing Using DLP on page 37, Example.
Updated Package Drawings on Section 6. Physical Interface on page 38.
Change the description of CR1[4] from “RFU” to “DNU” in Table 19 on page 49.
*N
5969843
BWHA
12/15/2017
Added Model C1 to DP speed option of Valid Combination in Section 12.2 Valid Combinations — Automotive Grade / AEC-Q100 on page 132.
Updated Sales page.
*O
6099450
BWHA
03/21/2018
Table 12 and Table 13: Removed the Max value of tCSH and updated the Max value of
tSU as “3000”.
*P
6215133
BWHA
06/22/2018
Updated Section 5.5.3 DDR Data Valid Timing Using DLP on page 37.
Updated Package Materials in Section 12 Ordering Information on page 131.
*Q
6457023
BWHA
01/23/2019
Updated FL-S device density in Section 1.2.2.5 Deep Power-Down on page 5.
Updated Section 5 Thermal Resistance on page 24.
*R
6554934
BWHA
04/30/2019
Added Section 11.4 Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) ASO Map —
Automotive Only on page 127.
Updated Section 1.3 Glossary on page 6.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Page 135 of 136
S25FL512S
Sales, Solutions, and Legal Information
Worldwide Sales and Design Support
Cypress maintains a worldwide network of offices, solution centers, manufacturer’s representatives, and distributors. To find the office
closest to you, visit us at Cypress Locations.
PSoC® Solutions
Products
®
®
Arm Cortex Microcontrollers
Automotive
cypress.com/arm
cypress.com/automotive
Clocks & Buffers
Interface
cypress.com/clocks
cypress.com/interface
Internet of Things
Memory
cypress.com/iot
cypress.com/memory
Microcontrollers
cypress.com/mcu
PSoC
cypress.com/psoc
Power Management ICs
cypress.com/pmic
Touch Sensing
Cypress Developer Community
Community | Projects | Video | Blogs | Training | Components
Technical Support
cypress.com/support
cypress.com/touch
USB Controllers
Wireless Connectivity
PSoC 1 | PSoC 3 | PSoC 4 | PSoC 5LP | PSoC 6 MCU
cypress.com/usb
cypress.com/wireless
© Cypress Semiconductor Corporation, 2011-2019. This document is the property of Cypress Semiconductor Corporation and its subsidiaries (“Cypress”). This document, including any software or
firmware included or referenced in this document (“Software”), is owned by Cypress under the intellectual property laws and treaties of the United States and other countries worldwide. Cypress
reserves all rights under such laws and treaties and does not, except as specifically stated in this paragraph, grant any license under its patents, copyrights, trademarks, or other intellectual property
rights. If the Software is not accompanied by a license agreement and you do not otherwise have a written agreement with Cypress governing the use of the Software, then Cypress hereby grants
you a personal, non-exclusive, nontransferable license (without the right to sublicense) (1) under its copyright rights in the Software (a) for Software provided in source code form, to modify and reproduce
the Software solely for use with Cypress hardware products, only internally within your organization, and (b) to distribute the Software in binary code form externally to end users (either directly or
indirectly through resellers and distributors), solely for use on Cypress hardware product units, and (2) under those claims of Cypress's patents that are infringed by the Software (as provided by
Cypress, unmodified) to make, use, distribute, and import the Software solely for use with Cypress hardware products. Any other use, reproduction, modification, translation, or compilation of the
Software is prohibited.
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, CYPRESS MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH REGARD TO THIS DOCUMENT OR ANY SOFTWARE
OR ACCOMPANYING HARDWARE, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. No computing
device can be absolutely secure. Therefore, despite security measures implemented in Cypress hardware or software products, Cypress shall have no liability arising out of any security breach, such
as unauthorized access to or use of a Cypress product. CYPRESS DOES NOT REPRESENT, WARRANT, OR GUARANTEE THAT CYPRESS PRODUCTS, OR SYSTEMS CREATED USING
CYPRESS PRODUCTS, WILL BE FREE FROM CORRUPTION, ATTACK, VIRUSES, INTERFERENCE, HACKING, DATA LOSS OR THEFT, OR OTHER SECURITY INTRUSION (collectively, "Security
Breach"). Cypress disclaims any liability relating to any Security Breach, and you shall and hereby do release Cypress from any claim, damage, or other liability arising from any Security Breach. In
addition, the products described in these materials may contain design defects or errors known as errata which may cause the product to deviate from published specifications. To the extent permitted
by applicable law, Cypress reserves the right to make changes to this document without further notice. Cypress does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or
circuit described in this document. Any information provided in this document, including any sample design information or programming code, is provided only for reference purposes. It is the
responsibility of the user of this document to properly design, program, and test the functionality and safety of any application made of this information and any resulting product. "High-Risk Device"
means any device or system whose failure could cause personal injury, death, or property damage. Examples of High-Risk Devices are weapons, nuclear installations, surgical implants, and other
medical devices. “Critical Component” means any component of a High-Risk Device whose failure to perform can be reasonably expected to cause, directly or indirectly, the failure of the High-Risk
Device, or to affect its safety or effectiveness. Cypress is not liable, in whole or in part, and you shall and hereby do release Cypress from any claim, damage, or other liability arising from any use of
a Cypress product as a Critical Component in a High-Risk Device. You shall indemnify and hold Cypress, its directors, officers, employees, agents, affiliates, distributors, and assigns harmless from
and against all claims, costs, damages, and expenses, arising out of any claim, including claims for product liability, personal injury or death, or property damage arising from any use of a Cypress
product as a Critical Component in a High-Risk Device. Cypress products are not intended or authorized for use as a Critical Component in any High-Risk Device except to the limited extent that (i)
Cypress's published data sheet for the product explicitly states Cypress has qualified the product for use in a specific High-Risk Device, or (ii) Cypress has given you advance written authorization to
use the product as a Critical Component in the specific High-Risk Device and you have signed a separate indemnification agreement.
Cypress, the Cypress logo, Spansion, the Spansion logo, and combinations thereof, WICED, PSoC, CapSense, EZ-USB, F-RAM, and Traveo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cypress in
the United States and other countries. For a more complete list of Cypress trademarks, visit cypress.com. Other names and brands may be claimed as property of their respective owners.
Document Number: 001-98284 Rev. *R
Revised April 30, 2019
Page 136 of 136
工商网监
湘ICP备2023018690号
